Canon 1263C004 DSLR Camera User Manual

Canon 1263C004 DSLR Camera User Manual
EOS 80D (W)
Instruction Manual
Instruction manuals (PDF files) and software can be downloaded
from the Canon Web site (p.4, 513).
www.canon.com/icpd
J
E
Introduction
The EOS 80D (W) is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a finedetail CMOS sensor with approx. 24.2 effective megapixels, DIGIC 6,
high-precision and high-speed 45-point AF (Cross-type AF point: Max.
45 points), max. approx. 7.0 fps continuous shooting, Live View
shooting, Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie shooting, and wireless
functions (Wi-Fi/NFC).
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Precautions” (p.20-22) and “Handling Precautions” (p.23-25). Also, read
this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.
Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they
come out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store
this manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images or copyrighted music and images with music on the memory
card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that
certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography
even for private enjoyment.
2
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with body cap)
Wide Strap
Battery Pack
LP-E6N
(with protective
cover)
Battery Charger
LC-E6/LC-E6E*
* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a
power cord.)




The camera does not come with an interface cable or HDMI cable.
The Instruction Manuals provided are listed on the next page.
If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
Depending on the Lens Kit type, lens instruction manuals may also be
included.
 Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
* For items sold separately, see System Map (p.468).
When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon
Web site (p.4).
The lens instruction manuals (PDF) are for lenses sold individually. Note
that when purchasing the lens kit, some of the accessories included with the
lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.
3
Instruction Manuals
Camera and Wireless Function Basic Instruction
Manual
The booklet is the Basic Instruction Manual.
More detailed Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be
downloaded from the Canon Web site.
Downloading and Viewing the Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)
1
Download the Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Connect to the Internet and access the following Canon Web site.
www.canon.com/icpd
 Select your country or region of residence and download the
Instruction Manuals.
Instruction Manuals Available for Download
•
•
•
•
•
Camera Instruction Manual
Wireless Function Instruction Manual
Camera and Wireless Function Basic Instruction Manual
Lens Instruction Manuals
Software Instruction Manuals
2 View the Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Double-click a downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open
it.
 To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat
Reader DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version
recommended) is required.
 Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded free from the
Internet.
 To learn how to use a PDF viewer, refer to its Help section.
Software can be downloaded from the Canon Web site (p.513).
4
Compatible Cards
The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of
capacity: If the card is new or was previously formatted by another
camera or computer, format the card with this camera (p.64).
 SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a reading/writing
speed class at least as high as shown in the following table.
Movie Recording Size (p.306)
Recording Formats
MOV
MP4
UHS Speed Class 3
or faster
-
L: 8 7
-
SD Speed Class 10
or faster
Other than above
-
SD Speed Class 6
or faster
-
SD Speed Class 4
or faster
ALL-I (For editing)
IPB (Standard)
IPB (Light)
 If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may
not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card
with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.
 To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s Web site.
In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory
cards, and SDXC memory cards.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
5
Quick Start Guide
Insert the battery (p.36).
1
To charge the battery, see page 34.
Insert the card (p.37).
2
3
With the card’s label facing
toward the back of the
camera, insert it into the card
slot.
White index
Red index
Attach the lens (p.47).
Align the lens’s white or red mount
index with the camera’s mount
index of the same color.
4
Set the lens’s focus mode
switch to <f> (p.47).
5
Set the power switch to <1>,
then set the Mode Dial to <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.78).
Turn the Mode Dial while holding down
the lock release button at the center.
All the necessary camera settings will
be set automatically.
6
Quick Start Guide
6
Flip out the LCD monitor (p.40).
7
Focus on the subject (p.50).
8
Take the picture (p.50).
9
Review the picture.
When the LCD monitor displays the
date/time/zone setting screens, see
page 43.
Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised.
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
The captured image will be
displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the
LCD monitor.
To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.346).
 To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.255).
 To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.346).
 To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.378).
7
Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
: Indicates the Main Dial.
<5>
: Indicates the Quick Control Dial.
<9> <W> <X> <Y> <Z>: Indicates the Multi-controller and the push
direction.
<0>
: Indicates the Setting button.
0, 9, 7, 8
: Indicates that each function remains
active for approx. 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec.,
or 16 sec. after you let go of the button.
* In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons
and displayed on the LCD monitor are also used in this manual when discussing
relevant operations and functionality.
3
: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button to change its settings.
O
: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that
the function is available only in the Creative Zone modes
(p.31).
(p.**)
: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
is set to <1> and the <R> switch is set down (Multi function
lock released) (p.41, 54).
It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM lens as an example.
8
Chapters
Introduction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2
Getting Started
33
Basic Shooting
77
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
115
Image Settings
141
Advanced Operations
189
Flash Photography
227
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
255
Shooting Movies
293
Image Playback
345
Post-Processing Images
389
Sensor Cleaning
403
Customizing the Camera
409
Reference
449
Software Start Guide /
Downloading Images to a Computer
511
9
Contents
Introduction
2
Item Check List................................................................................. 3
Instruction Manuals .......................................................................... 4
Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6
Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8
Chapters........................................................................................... 9
Index to Features ........................................................................... 17
Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 20
Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 23
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 26
1
Getting Started
33
Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 34
Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 36
Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 37
Using the LCD Monitor ................................................................... 40
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 41
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone................................................... 43
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 46
Attaching and Detaching a Lens..................................................... 47
Basic Operation.............................................................................. 49
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 56
3 Menu Operations .................................................................. 58
d Using the Touch Screen ............................................................. 61
Before You Start ............................................................................. 64
Formatting the Card..................................................................... 64
Disabling the Beeper ................................................................... 66
Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off ................................. 66
Setting the Image Review Time ................................................... 67
10
Contents
Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On ..................................................67
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings.............................. 68
Displaying the Grid.......................................................................... 71
Q Displaying the Electronic Level ...............................................72
Displaying the Flicker Detection......................................................74
Feature Guide and Help.................................................................. 75
2
Basic Shooting
77
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................78
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)..........................81
7 Disabling Flash ......................................................................... 83
C Creative Auto Shooting.............................................................84
8: Special Scene Mode .............................................................88
P Shooting Food ............................................................................ 89
C Shooting Children ...................................................................... 90
x Shooting Candlelight Portraits ...................................................91
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ....................................92
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)............................................93
G Shooting Backlit Scenes............................................................ 94
2 Shooting Portraits ...................................................................... 95
3 Shooting Landscapes ............................................................... 96
4 Shooting Close-ups....................................................................97
5 Shooting Moving Subjects ........................................................ 98
v Applying Creative Filters ......................................................... 101
Q Quick Control........................................................................... 106
Shooting with Ambience Selection................................................108
Shooting by Lighting or Scene Type ............................................. 112
11
Contents
3
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
115
f: Selecting the AF Operation....................................................116
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point ...................................... 120
AF Area Selection Modes............................................................. 124
AF Sensor .................................................................................... 127
Lenses and Usable AF Points ...................................................... 128
When Autofocus Fails .................................................................. 136
MF: Manual Focus ..................................................................... 137
i Selecting the Drive Mode ....................................................... 138
j Using the Self-timer................................................................. 140
4
Image Settings
141
Setting the Image-Recording Quality ........................................... 142
Changing the Image’s Aspect Ratio ............................................. 146
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos ................................. 148
A Selecting a Picture Style ...................................................... 154
A Customizing a Picture Style ................................................. 157
A Registering a Picture Style ................................................... 160
Setting the White Balance ............................................................ 162
White Balance............................................................................ 163
Q Setting the Auto White Balance .......................................... 163
O Custom White Balance........................................................ 164
P Setting the Color Temperature ............................................. 166
White Balance Correction............................................................. 167
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast................................. 169
Setting Noise Reduction ............................................................... 170
Highlight Tone Priority .................................................................. 174
Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations ......... 175
Reducing Flicker........................................................................... 179
Setting the Color Space................................................................ 181
Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................... 182
12
Contents
File Numbering Methods...............................................................184
Setting Copyright Information .......................................................186
5
Advanced Operations
189
d: Program AE.............................................................................190
s: Shutter-Priority AE ................................................................ 192
f: Aperture-Priority AE..............................................................194
Depth-of-Field Preview...............................................................195
a: Manual Exposure.................................................................... 196
q Selecting the Metering Mode .................................................. 198
O Setting Exposure Compensation .............................................200
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB).................................................. 201
A AE Lock ...................................................................................203
F: Bulb Exposures ....................................................................... 204
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting...............................207
P Multiple Exposures..................................................................212
2 Mirror Lockup .........................................................................219
Using the Eyepiece Cover ............................................................ 220
F Using a Remote Switch............................................................. 221
R Remote Control Shooting...........................................................221
p Interval Timer Shooting ..................................................... 223
6
Flash Photography
227
D Using the Built-in Flash ............................................................. 228
D Using an External Speedlite ...................................................... 233
Setting the Flash ........................................................................... 235
Wireless Flash Photography ......................................................... 244
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 255
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor ............................................... 256
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................264
U Applying Creative Filters ......................................................... 266
13
Contents
Menu Function Settings................................................................ 270
Selecting the AF Operation .......................................................... 274
Focusing with AF (AF Method)..................................................... 276
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter............................................. 286
MF: Focusing Manually ................................................................ 288
8
Shooting Movies
293
k Shooting Movies..................................................................... 294
Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 304
Setting the Movie Recording Size ................................................ 306
Using Movie Digital Zoom..............................................................311
Setting the Sound Recording ....................................................... 312
Shooting HDR Movies .................................................................. 314
v Shooting Movies with Creative Filters..................................... 316
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies ................................................ 319
Menu Function Settings................................................................ 326
Shooting Video Snapshots ........................................................... 333
9
Image Playback
345
x Image Playback ..................................................................... 346
B: Shooting Information Display ............................................ 348
x Searching for Images Quickly ................................................ 353
u/y Magnified View ................................................................... 355
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen ........................................ 356
b Rotating the Image .................................................................. 358
Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 359
Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 361
k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 363
k Playing Back Movies .............................................................. 365
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 367
Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 369
14
Contents
Viewing Images on a TV Set......................................................... 373
K Protecting Images ................................................................... 376
L Erasing Images ........................................................................ 378
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)..........................................380
p Specifying Images for a Photobook..........................................384
Changing Image Playback Settings .............................................. 386
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................... 386
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................................387
10
Post-Processing Images
389
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera ...........................390
S Resizing JPEG Images ...........................................................395
N Cropping JPEG Images...........................................................397
U Applying Creative Filters ......................................................... 399
11
Sensor Cleaning
403
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning................................................... 404
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................405
Manual Sensor Cleaning...............................................................407
12
Customizing the Camera
409
Setting Custom Functions............................................................. 410
Custom Functions ......................................................................... 411
Custom Function Settings............................................................. 413
C.Fn I: Exposure ........................................................................ 413
C.Fn II: Autofocus ......................................................................416
C.Fn III: Operation/Others .......................................................... 425
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus ................................. 427
8: Custom Controls .................................................................... 433
Registering My Menu .................................................................... 440
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes..................................... 445
15
Contents
13
Reference
449
B Button Functions ................................................................ 450
Checking the Battery Information ................................................. 452
Using a Household Power Outlet ................................................. 456
H Using Eye-Fi Cards................................................................. 457
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode .............................. 460
System Map ................................................................................. 468
Menu Settings .............................................................................. 470
Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................. 481
Error Codes .................................................................................. 496
Specifications ............................................................................... 497
14
Software Start Guide /
Downloading Images to a Computer
511
Software Start Guide .................................................................... 512
Downloading and Viewing the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF Files) ... 514
Downloading Images to a Computer ............................................ 515
Index............................................................................................. 517
16
Index to Features
Power
LCD Monitor
Charging the battery
 p.34
Brightness adjustment
 p.386
Battery level
 p.42
Touch screen
 p.61
Electronic level
 p.72
Feature guide
 p.75
Help
 p.76
Checking battery
information
 p.452
Household power outlet  p.456
Auto power off
 p.66
Cards
Formatting
AF
AF operation
 p.64
Release shutter without
card
 p.38
Lens
 p.116
AF area selection mode  p.120
AF point selection
 p.122
Lens group
 p.128
 p.424
Attaching/Detaching
 p.47
AF points lighting up
in red
Zoom
 p.48
AF Microadjustment
 p.427
Manual focusing
 p.137
Basic Settings
Language
 p.46
Date/Time/Zone
 p.43
Beeper
 p.66
Copyright information
 p.186
Clear all camera settings  p.68
Viewfinder
Dioptric adjustment
 p.49
Eyepiece cover
 p.220
Electronic level
Grid
Aspect ratio line
 p.146
Metering
Metering mode
 p.198
Drive
Drive mode
 p.138
Self-timer
 p.140
Maximum burst
 p.145
Recording Images
 p.73
Creating/Selecting
a folder
 p.182
 p.71
File numbering
 p.184
17
Index to Features
Image Quality
Exposure
Image-recording quality  p.142
Exposure compensation  p.200
ISO speed
 p.148
Picture Style
 p.154
Exposure compensation
with M+ISO Auto
 p.197
White balance
 p.162
AEB
 p.201
Auto Lighting Optimizer  p.169
AE lock
 p.203
Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds
Safety shift
 p.415
 p.170
Noise reduction for long
exposures
 p.172
Highlight tone priority
Lens aberration
correction
 p.174
 p.175
Reducing flicker
 p.179
Color space
 p.181
Flash
Built-in flash
 p.228
External flash
 p.233
Flash function settings
 p.235
Wireless shooting
 p.244
Live View Shooting
Live View shooting
 p.255
AF operation
 p.274
 p.30
AF method
 p.276
 p.207
Aspect ratio
 p.146
 p.212
Creative filters
 p.266
Mirror lockup
 p.219
Touch shutter
 p.286
Bulb timer
 p.205
Interval timer
 p.223
Movie shooting
 p.293
Depth-of-field preview
 p.195
AF method
 p.276
Remote control
 p.221
Movie Servo AF
 p.326
Quick Control
 p.56
Movie recording quality  p.306
Multi function lock
 p.54
Manual exposure
 p.298
Movie digital zoom
 p.311
Sound recording
 p.312
HDR movie shooting
 p.314
Shooting
Shooting mode
HDR Mode
Multiple exposures
18
Movie Shooting
Index to Features
Creative filters for
movies
 p.316
RAW image processing  p.390
Video snapshot
 p.333
Resizing JPEGs
 p.395
Time-lapse movie
 p.319
Cropping JPEGs
 p.397
Movie Servo AF speed
 p.329
Creative filters
 p.399
Image Editing
Movie Servo AF tracking
sensitivity
 p.330
Remote control shooting  p.332
Playback
Image review time
 p.67
Single-image display
 p.346
Shooting information
display
 p.348
Index display
 p.353
Customization
Custom Functions (C.Fn)  p.410
Custom Controls
 p.433
My Menu
 p.440
Custom shooting mode  p.445
Sensor Cleaning and Dust
Reduction
Sensor cleaning
 p.404
Append Dust Delete Data  p.405
Image browsing
(Jump display)
 p.354
Magnified view
 p.355
Software Start Guide
 p.512
Image rotate
 p.358
Rating
 p.359
Software Instruction
Manuals
 p.514
Movie playback
 p.365
Wireless Functions
Slide show
 p.369
Viewing images on a
TV set
 p.373
Protect
 p.376
Erase
 p.378
Touch playback
 p.356
Print Order (DPOF)
 p.380
Photobook Set-up
 p.384
Software
 Wireless Function Instruction
Manual
19
Safety Precautions
The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to
yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow
these precautions before using the product.
If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the
product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer
from whom you purchased the product.
Warnings:
Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or
serious injuries may result.
 To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the
Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries, or the
product if it is damaged.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or
solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the
battery to strong physical shock.
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable charging
(working) temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharging time indicated in
the Instruction Manual.
• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
 When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape. Contact with
other metallic objects or batteries may cause a fire or an explosion.
 If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.
 If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it
immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire,
electrical shock or burns if you keep using it.
 Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage comes in contact with your
eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing
it. See a physician immediately.
 Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
 Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
 Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.
20
Safety Precautions
 When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery,
and disconnect the power plug and connecting cables from the equipment before
storing. This is to prevent electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, and corrosion.
 Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or a fire.
 If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,
do not touch the exposed parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.
 Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts may cause
electrical shock.
 Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or
lens. Doing so may damage your vision.
 Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps
or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury
may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If
a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.
 Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, keep the battery
away from metallic items and store it with its protective cover attached to prevent
short-circuit. This is to prevent fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, and burns.
 Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
 To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Always insert the power plug all the way in.
• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the
cord. Also, do not twist or tie the cords.
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
 Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet
with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power
outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.
 Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter
outlet. The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing fire,
burns, or injuries.
 A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
 Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
 Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and
cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
 Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water
or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent fire,
electrical shock, and burns.
 Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
21
Safety Precautions
Cautions:
Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury
or property damage may result.
 Do not use or store the product in a high-temperature location such as inside a car
under the hot sun. The product may become hot and cause burns. Doing so may
also cause battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or
shorten the life of the product.
 Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
an injury or an accident. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the
camera and lens.
 Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of
time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.
 Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes.
22
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
 This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
 The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
 To maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal
cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly
closed.
 This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to help
prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting
inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting
inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust, water, and salt to get
on the camera.
 If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt, dust,
or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.
 Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may cause
a malfunction.
 Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water, or
salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
 If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that
moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly
consult the nearest Canon Service Center.
 Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
 Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
 The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
23
Handling Precautions
 Do not block the built-in flash or mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing
so may cause a malfunction.
 Use only a commercially-available blower to blow away dust when it adheres
to the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, focusing screen, etc. Do not use
cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For
stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.
 Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts may cause camera
malfunction.
 If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
 If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
 If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
 Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
 If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera
yourself and make sure it is working properly.
 If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a
prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.
 If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
24
Handling Precautions
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor
 Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels
displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
 If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
 The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black
in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
 Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
 Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
 Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
 Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
 Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
 Store the card in a case, etc.
 Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens
with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to avoid
scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
25
Nomenclature
LCD panel (p.28)
<R> Drive mode selection button (p.138)
<f> AF operation selection button (p.116)
<g> ISO speed
setting button (p.148)
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam emitter
(p.228/119)
<D> Metering mode
selection button (p.198)
EF lens mount index (p.47)
<B> AF area selection
mode button (p.121)
EF-S lens mount index (p.47)
Flash sync contacts
Hot shoe (p.233)
<6> Main Dial
(p.51)
<D> Flash button (p.228)
Mode Dial lockrelease button (p.51)
<U> LCD panel
illumination button
(p.55)
Mode Dial
(p.30)
Shutter button
(p.50)
Strap mount
(p.33)
Red-eye
reduction/Selftimer lamp
(p.230/140)
Microphones
(p.294)
p (N-Mark)*
Remote control
sensor (p.221)
Lens release
button (p.48)
Grip (Battery
compartment)
Lens lock pin
DC coupler cord hole (p.456)
Lens mount
Depth-of-field preview
button (p.195)
Contacts (p.25)
Mirror (p.219, 407)
<Y> External microphone
IN terminal (p.313)
<y> Headphone terminal (p.313)
<C> Digital terminal (p.515)
<D> HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.373)
<F> Remote control terminal (p.221)
Body cap (p.47)
* Used for wireless connections via the NFC function.
26
Nomenclature
<p> AF start button
(p.50, 116, 257, 303)
<V> Focal plane mark (p.97)
<A/k> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch (p.256/294)
<0> Start/Stop button (p.256, 294)
<A> AE lock/FE lock
button/
<y> Index/Reduce
button
(p.203, 232/353, 355)
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.49)
Speaker (p.365)
Eyecup (p.220)
<S> AF point
selection/<u> Magnify
button (p.122/355)
Viewfinder eyepiece
Power switch (p.41)
Access lamp
(p.39)
Strap mount
(p.33)
<M> Menu
button (p.58)
<B>
Info button
(p.55, 72, 76,
258, 262, 300,
346, 450)
Card slot
cover
(p.37)
Battery
compartment
cover release
lever (p.36)
Battery compartment
cover (p.36)
LCD monitor/Touch screen
(p.58, 66/61, 356, 367)
Serial number
Tripod socket
<Q> Quick Control button (p.56)
<x> Playback button (p.346)
<9> <W> <X> <Y> <Z>
Multi-controller (p.53)
<5> Quick Control Dial (p.52)
Multi function lock switch (p.54)
<L> Erase button (p.378)
<0> Setting button (p.58)
Card slot (p.37)
27
Nomenclature
LCD Panel
Drive mode (p.138)
u Single shooting
o High-speed continuous
shooting
i Low-speed continuous shooting
B Silent single shooting
M Silent continuous shooting
Q Self-timer: 10 sec./remote
control
k Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.174)
<g> ISO speed (p.148)
ISO speed (p.148)
Possible shots
Self-timer countdown
Bulb exposure time
Error number/Error code (Err)
Remaining images to record
Time-lapse movie shooting
(p.319)
Metering mode
(p.198)
q Evaluative
metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted
average metering
<p>
Interval timer shooting (p.223)
Bulb timer shooting (p.205)
AF operation (p.116, 274)
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
AI Servo AF
K
Servo AF
4L
Manual Focus
(p.137, 288)
Wi-Fi function
Battery level
(p.42)
<P> Multiple-exposure
shooting (p.212)
<O> Exposure compensation
(p.200)
Shutter speed
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recycling (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Error code (Err)
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount (p.200)
AEB range (p.201)
Aperture
AF point selection (MAF,
SEL N, SEL AF)
 The display will show only the settings currently applied.
28
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
Single-point AF
(Manual selection) (p.120)
Focusing screen
Area AF frame
(p.120)
Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)
(p.120)
Large Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone) (p.120)
45-point automatic
selection AF (p.120)
AF point (p.120)
Grid (p.71)
Aspect ratio line
(p.146)
Spot metering
circle (p.198)
Flicker detection
(p.74, 179)
Electronic level
(p.73)
<z>
Battery level
(p.42)
Warning symbol
(p.425)
<g> ISO
speed (p.148)
<o> Focus indicator
(p.78)
<A> AE lock (p.203) /
AEB in-progress (p.201)
<D> Flash-ready
(p.228, 233)
Improper FE lock warning
<d> FE lock (p.232) /
FEB in-progress (p.242)
<e> High-speed sync
(p.241)
<y> Flash exposure
compensation (p.230, 233)
Maximum burst (p.145)
Number of remaining
multiple exposures (p.213)
ISO speed (p.148)
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.174)
<O> Exposure compensation (p.200)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount (p.200)
AEB range (p.201)
Red-eye reduction lamp ON
AF point selection
(MAF, SEL N, SEL AF)
Shutter speed (p.192)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Aperture (p.194)
Built-in flash recycling (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card/card error warning (Card)
Card full warning (FuLL)
Error code (Err)
 The display will show only the settings currently applied.
29
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial
lock-release button).
Basic Zone
All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to
suit the subject or scene for shooting.
A
7
C
8
P
: Scene Intelligent Auto (p.78)
: Flash Off (p.83)
: Creative Auto (p.84)
: Special scene (p.88)
Food (p.89)
G HDR Backlight Control (p.94)
C Kids (p.90)
2 Portrait (p.95)
x Candlelight (p.91)
3 Landscape (p.96)
6 Night Portrait (p.92)
4 Close-up (p.97)
F Handheld Night Scene (p.93)
5 Sports (p.98)
v: Creative filters (p.101)
G Grainy B/W (p.103)
Z Water painting effect (p.104)
W Soft focus (p.103)
A HDR art standard (p.104)
X Fish-eye effect (p.104)
B HDR art vivid (p.105)
H Toy camera effect (p.104)
C HDR art bold (p.105)
c Miniature effect (p.104)
D HDR art embossed (p.105)
30
Nomenclature
Creative Zone
These modes give you more control for shooting
various subjects as desired.
d : Program AE (p.190)
s : Shutter-priority AE (p.192)
f : Aperture-priority AE (p.194)
a : Manual exposure (p.196)
F : Bulb (p.204)
Custom shooting mode
You can register the shooting mode (d/s/f/a/F), AF
operation, menu settings, etc., to w, x Mode Dial positions
(p.445).
31
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E6
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.34).
Power plug
Battery pack slot
Charge lamp
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.
Battery Charger LC-E6E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.34).
Power cord
Charge lamp
Battery pack slot
Power cord socket
32
1
Getting Started
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start
shooting and basic camera operations.
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through
the camera’s strap mount eyelet
from the bottom. Then pass it
through the strap’s buckle as shown
in the illustration. Pull the strap to
take up any slack and make sure
the strap will not loosen from the
buckle.
The eyepiece cover is attached to
the strap (p.220).
Eyepiece cover
33
Charging the Battery
1
Remove the protective cover.
 Detach the protective cover provided
with the battery.
the battery.
2 Attach
 As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
 To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
LC-E6
the battery.
3 Recharge
For LC-E6
 As shown by the arrow, flip out the
battery charger’s prongs and insert
the prongs into a power outlet.
For LC-E6E
LC-E6E
 Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
 Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Charge Level
0-49%
50-74%
75% or higher
Fully charged
Color
Orange
Green
Charge lamp
Display
Blinks once per second
Blinks twice per second
Blinks three times per second
Lights up
 It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely
exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time
required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the
ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
 For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
34
Charging the Battery
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
 Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
 Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.
 After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
 You can attach the cover in a different
orientation to indicate whether the battery
has been recharged or not.
If the battery has been recharged, attach the
cover so that the battery-shaped hole <V> is
aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is
exhausted, attach the cover in the opposite orientation.
 When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter
battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing
the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery’s performance.
 The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for
the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.
 If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.452) and purchase a new battery.
 After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 10 sec.
 If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.452) is 94% or higher, the battery
will not be recharged.
 The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.
35
Installing and Removing the Battery
Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera.
The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is
installed, and darkens when the battery is removed. If the battery
is not installed, the picture in the viewfinder becomes blurred and
focus cannot be achieved.
Installing the Battery
1
Open the cover.
 Slide the lever as shown by the
arrows and open the cover.
the battery.
2 Insert
 Insert the end with the electrical
contacts.
 Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
the cover.
3 Close
 Press the cover until it snaps shut.
Only Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 can be used.
Removing the Battery
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
 Press the battery lock lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
 To prevent short circuiting of the electrical
contacts, be sure to attach the provided
protective cover (p.34) to the battery.
36
Installing and Removing the Card
You can use an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card (sold separately)
with the camera. SDHC and SDXC memory cards with UHS-I can also
be used. The captured images are recorded onto the card.
Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to enable
writing and erasing.
Installing the Card
1
Write-protect switch
Open the cover.
 Slide the cover as shown by the
arrows to open it.
the card.
2 Insert
 As shown by the illustration, face
the card’s label side toward you
and insert it until it clicks in place.
the cover.
3 Close
 Close the cover and slide it in the
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
 When you set the power switch to
<1>, the number of possible shots
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
Possible shots
37
Installing and Removing the Card
 The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
 Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from shooting without a card inserted (p.470).
Removing the Card
Access lamp
1
Open the cover.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Make sure the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
 If [Recording...] is displayed, close
the cover.
the card.
2 Remove
 Gently push in the card, then let go to
eject it.
 Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
38
Installing and Removing the Card
 When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time.
Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power
outlet accessories (sold separately, p.456) are used).
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.184).
 If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.64). The card
may then return to normal.
 Do not touch the card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do
not expose the contacts to dust or water. If a smudge adheres to the
contacts, contact failure may result.
 Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).
39
Using the LCD Monitor
After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live
View shooting, shoot movies, or play back images and movies. You can
change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor.
1
Flip out the LCD monitor.
the LCD monitor.
2 Rotate
 When the LCD monitor is swung out,
180°
90°
175°
you can rotate it up, down, or over
180° to face the subject.
 The indicated angle is only
approximate.
it toward you.
3 Face
 Normally, use the camera with the
LCD monitor facing you.
Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor.
 When not using the camera, close the LCD monitor with the screen
facing inward. This will protect the screen.
 During Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor
toward the subject will display a mirror image on the screen (right/left
reversed).
40
Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting
screen appears, see page 43 to set the date/time/zone.
<1> : The camera turns on.
<2> : The camera is turned off and
does not function. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 Whenever you set the power switch
to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be performed
automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning,
the LCD monitor will display <f>.
 You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter
button halfway (p.50) to stop cleaning and take a picture.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.
3 Auto Power Off
 To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after
approx. 1 minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just
press the shutter button halfway (p.50).
 You can change the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.66).
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
recording finishes.
41
Turning on the Power
z Battery Level Indicator
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be
indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon (b) indicates
that the battery will be exhausted soon.
Display
z
x
c
m
Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10
Number of Possible Shots
bn
9-1
0
(Approx. number of shots)
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
No Flash
1390
1250
50% Flash Use
960
860
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, no Live
View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing
standards.
 Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately)
• With LP-E6N x 2: approx. twice the shots without the battery grip.
• With AA/LR6 alkaline batteries at room temperature (23°C / 73°F): approx.
560 shots with no flash, approx. 400 shots with 50% flash use.
 Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery sooner:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
 The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
 The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on
the lens used, the battery power may exhaust faster.
 For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 257.
 See [53: Battery info.] to check the battery condition in detail (p.452).
 With Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately) loaded with AA/R6 batteries,
a four-level indicator will be displayed. ([x/m] will not be
displayed.)
42
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone
have been reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow
the steps below to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time
zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply
change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination, and the
camera will automatically adjust the date/time.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select [Date/
2 Under
Time/Zone].
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the [52] tab.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[Date/Time/Zone], then press <0>.
the time zone.
3 Set
 [London] is set by default.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[Time zone], then press <0>.
 The menu setting procedure is explained on page 58.
 In step 3, the time displayed in [Time zone] is the time difference
compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
43
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
 Select the [Zone] box, then press
<0>.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the time zone, then press <0>.
 If you do not see your time zone, you
can also set the time difference with
UTC directly. In such a case, press
the <Y> <Z> keys to select the
[Time difference] box, then press
<0> so <r> is displayed.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to set, then
press <0>. (Returns to <s>.)
 After setting, press the <Y> <Z>
keys to select [OK], then press <0>.
The previous screen will reappear.
the date and time.
4 Set
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the number.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to set, then
press <0>. (Returns to <s>.)
the daylight saving time.
5 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[Y].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[Z], then press <0>.
 When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hour.
44
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
[OK], then press <0>.
 The date/time/zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
The date/time/zone settings may be reset in the following cases. If this
happens, set the date/time/zone again.
• When the camera is stored without the battery.
• When the camera’s battery becomes exhausted.
• When the camera is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a
prolonged period.
 The date/time that were set will start when you select [OK] in step 6.
 After changing the time zone or time difference setting, check that the
correct date and time are set.
45
3 Selecting the Interface Language
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select
2 Under
[LanguageK].
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the [52] tab.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the [LanguageK], then press
<0>.
the desired language.
3 Set
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the language, then press <0>.
 The interface language will change.
46
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses. The
camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
 Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
the lens.
2 Attach
 Align the lens’s red or white index
White index
with the camera’s index matching the
same color. Turn the lens as shown
by the arrow until it clicks in place.
Red index
the lens’s focus mode switch
3 Set
to <AF>.
 <AF> stands for autofocus.
 If it is set to <MF> (manual focus),
autofocus will not operate.
4 Remove the front lens cap.
Minimizing Dust
 When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
 When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
 Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
47
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Zooming
Turn the zoom ring on the lens
with your fingers.
 If you want to zoom, do it before
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after
achieving focus may throw off the
focus.
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
 Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
 Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
 Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
 When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch
to <2>.
 If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
Angle of View
Since the image sensor size is smaller
than the 35mm film format, the effective
angle of view of an attached lens will be
equivalent to that of a lens with approx.
1.6x of the focal length indicated.
48
Image sensor size (Approx.)
(22.3 x 14.9 mm /
0.88 x 0.59 in.)
35mm film size
(36 x 24 mm /
1.42 x 0.94 in.)
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
 Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points in the viewfinder look the
sharpest.
 If the knob is difficult to turn, remove
the eyecup (p.220).
If the camera dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is
recommended.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see pages 82 and 255.
49
Basic Operation
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel (0).
Pressing Completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
 In Creative Zone modes, pressing the <p> button is the same as
pressing the shutter button halfway.
 If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway
first, or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it
completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes
the picture.
 Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can
go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button halfway.
50
Basic Operation
Mode Dial
Turn the dial while holding down
the lock release button at the
center of the dial.
Use it to set the shooting mode.
6 Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<6> dial.
When you press a button such as <f>
<R> <i> <D>, the respective
function remains selected for the
duration of the timer (9). During this
time, you can turn the <6> dial to set
the desired setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
 Use this dial to select or set the AF
operation, drive mode, ISO speed,
metering mode, AF point selection,
etc.
(2) Turn the <6> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <6> dial to change the
setting.
 Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set
upward (Multi function lock, p.54).
51
Basic Operation
5 Quick Control Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
When you press a button such as <f>
<R> <i> <D>, the respective
function remains selected for the
duration of the timer (9). During this
time, you can turn the <5> dial to set
the desired setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
 Use this dial to select or set the AF
operation, drive mode, ISO speed,
metering mode, AF point selection,
etc.
(2) Turn the <5> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <5> dial to change the
setting.
 Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture
setting for manual exposures, etc.
The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set
upward (Multi function lock, p.54).
52
Basic Operation
9 Multi-controller
The Multi-controller <9> has eight keys that tilt in the directions shown
by the arrows.
 Use the eight keys to select the AF
point, correct the white balance,
move the AF point or magnifying
frame during Live View shooting or
movie shooting, or scroll around
magnified images during playback.
 With the Menu and Quick Control
operations, the Multi-controller takes
effect only for the vertical and
horizontal shifts, <W> <X> <Y> <Z>.
AF point selection, white balance correction, and scrolling around magnified
images during playback are possible even when the <R> switch is set
upward (Multi function lock, p.54).
53
Basic Operation
R Multi Function Lock
With [54: Multi function lock] set and the <R> switch set
upward, the camera prevents you from changing settings inadvertently
by moving the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, and Multi-controller or by
touching the touch panel.
<R> switch set downward: Lock
released
<R> switch set upward: Lock
engaged
1
Select [Multi function lock].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Multi
function lock], then press <0>.
a checkmark [X] to the
2 Add
camera control to be locked.
 Select a camera control and press
<0> to add a checkmark [X].
 Select [OK].
 The selected camera controls will be
locked when the multi function lock
switch is in the locked position.
 If the <R> switch is set upward and you try to use one of the locked
camera controls (except when [hTouch control] is set), <L> will be
displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel. On the shooting
function settings display (p.55), [LOCK] will be displayed. During Live
View shooting, [LOCK] will be displayed on the LCD monitor.
 By default, when locked, the <5> dial will be locked.
 In Basic Zone modes, only [hTouch control] is settable.
54
Basic Operation
U LCD Panel Illumination
You can illuminate the LCD panel by
pressing the <U> button. Turn on (9)
or off the LCD panel illumination by
pressing the <U> button.
During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off
the LCD panel illumination.
Displaying Shooting Function Settings
After you press the <B> button a number of times, the shooting
function settings will be displayed.
With the shooting function settings displayed, you can turn the Mode
Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode (p.451).
Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
function settings (p.56).
Press the <B> button again to turn off the display.
55
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired function.
2 Set
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select a function.
 The settings of the selected function
and Feature guide (p.75) will appear.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change the setting.
Basic Zone modes
Creative Zone modes
the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed.
 For the functions settable in Basic Zone modes and their setting
procedures, see page 107.
 In steps 1 and 2, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen
(p.61).
56
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Sample Quick Control Screen
Aperture (p.194)
Shutter speed (p.192)
Shooting mode*1 (p.30)
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
(p.200/201)
Flash exposure compensation (p.230)
AE lock*2 (p.203)
Highlight tone priority*2 (p.174)
ISO speed (p.148)
Wi-Fi function*3
Picture Style (p.154)
Custom Controls (p.433)
AF operation (p.116)
Image-recording quality
(p.142)
Return
White balance (p.162)
AF area selection mode (p.121)
White balance correction (p.167)
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.169)
Drive mode (p.138)
White balance bracketing (p.168)
Metering mode (p.198)
*1 : Settable only when the Mode Dial is set to <8> or <v>.
*2 : These functions cannot be set with Quick Control.
*3 : Refer to the Wireless Function Instruction Manual.
Quick Control
 <0>
 Select the desired function and press
<0>. The function’s setting screen
will appear.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial or press
the <Y> <Z> keys to change the
settings. There are also some
functions that are set by pressing the
<B>, <B>, or <L> button.
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the Quick Control screen.
 When you select <V> (p.433) or
<H> (p.120) and press the
<M> button, the previous screen
will reappear.
57
3 Menu Operations
You can set various settings with the menus such as the imagerecording quality, date and time, etc.
<M> button
<Q> button
<0> button
LCD monitor
<W><X><Y><Z>
keys
Menus in Basic Zone Modes
* Some menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
Menus in Creative Zone Modes
3: Playback
z: Shooting
Secondary
tabs
Menu items
58
5: Set-up
8: Custom Functions
9: My Menu
Main tabs
Menu settings
3 Menu Operations
Menu Setting Procedure
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
a tab.
2 Select
 Each time you press the <Q> button,
the main tab (group of functions) will
switch.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
secondary tab.
 For example, in this manual, the
[z3] tab refers to the screen
displayed when the z (Shooting)
tab’s [3] is selected.
the desired item.
3 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the item, then press <0>.
the setting.
4 Select
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select the desired setting.
(Some settings require you to press
either the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select those settings.)
 The current setting is indicated in
blue.
the desired setting.
5 Set
 Press <0> to set it.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <M> button to return to
the shooting function settings display.
59
3 Menu Operations
 In step 2, you can also turn the <6> dial to select a menu tab. In step
4, you can also turn the <5> dial to select certain settings.
 In steps 2 to 5, you can also use the LCD monitor’s touch screen (p.61).
 The explanation of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
 To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
 For details about each menu item, see page 470.
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: When Multi Shot
Noise Reduction is set
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will
become settable.
Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function.
With [54: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to
the default settings (p.68).
60
d Using the Touch Screen
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can operate with
your fingers.
Tap
Sample Display (Quick Control)
 Use your finger to tap on (touch
briefly and then remove your finger
from) the LCD monitor.
 By tapping, you can select menus,
icons, etc., displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 When touch-screen operation is
possible, a frame will appear around
the icon (except on menu screens).
For example, when you tap on [Q],
the Quick Control screen appears. By
tapping on [2], you can return to the
preceding screen.
Operations possible by tapping on the screen
 Setting menu functions after pressing the <M> button
 Quick Control
 Setting functions after pressing the <f>, <R>, <i>, <D>,
<S>, or <B> button
 Touch shutter during Live View shooting
 Setting functions during Live View shooting
 Setting functions during movie shooting
 Playback operations
61
d Using the Touch Screen
Drag
Sample Display (Menu screen)
 Slide your finger while touching the
LCD monitor.
Sample Display (Scale display)
Operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen
 Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button
 Setting a scale control
 Quick Control
 Selecting AF points
 Setting functions during Live View shooting
 Setting functions during movie shooting
 Playback operations
3 Silencing the Beep during Touch Operations
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Touch to n], the
beep will not sound during touch
operations.
62
d Using the Touch Screen
3 Touch Control Settings
1
Select [Touch control].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Touch
control], then press <0>.
the touch control setting.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 [Standard] is the normal setting.
 [Sensitive] provides a more reactive
touch response than [Standard]. Try
using both settings and select the one
you prefer.
 To disable touch-screen operations,
select [Disable].
Cautions for Touch Screen Operations
 Since the LCD monitor is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp
objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations.
 Do not use wet fingers for touch screen operations.
 If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your fingers are wet, the touch
screen may not respond or misoperation may occur. In such a case, turn
off the power and wipe the LCD monitor with a cloth.
 Attaching a commercially-available protective sheet or sticker on the
LCD monitor may make the touch operation response slow.
 If you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch
response may be slower.
63
Before You Start
3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with this camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to
a computer, etc., before formatting the card.
1
Select [Format card].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
the card.
2 Format
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 The card will be formatted.
 When the formatting is completed,
the menu will reappear.
 For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to add a checkmark [X]
to [Low level format], then select
[OK].
64
Before You Start
Format the card in the following cases:




The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full of images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.496).
Low-level Formatting
 Perform low-level formatting if the card’s recording or reading speed seems
slow or if you want to totally erase data on the card.
 Since low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card, the
formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.
 You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the card as
usual.
 When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, perform low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent the personal data from being leaked.
 Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software on the card must be
installed on your computer. Then format the card with the camera.
 The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
 This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
65
Before You Start
3 Disabling the Beeper
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved,
during self-timer shooting, and for touch screen operations.
1
Select [Beep].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep],
then press <0>.
[Disable].
2 Select
 Select [Disable], then press <0>.
 The beeper will not sound.
 If [Touch to n] is selected, the
beeper will be silent for touch screen
operations only.
3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set
time of idle operation elapses. The default setting is 1 min., but this
setting can be changed. If you do not want the camera to turn off
automatically, set this to [Disable]. After the power turns off, you can
turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other
buttons.
1
Select [Auto power off].
 Under the [52] tab, select [Auto
power off], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30
min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)
66
Before You Start
3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor
immediately after shooting. To keep the image displayed, set [Hold]. To
not have the image displayed, set [Off].
1
Select [Image review].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time
elapses.
3 Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On
The shooting function settings screen (p.55) can be set to display or
turn off when you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Select [LCD off/on btn].
 Under the [52] tab, select [LCD off/
on btn], then press <0>.
the desired setting.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 [Remains on]: Display remains on even when you press the shutter
button halfway. To turn off the display, press the
<B> button.
 [Shutter btn.]: When you press the shutter button halfway, the
display will turn off. When you let go of the shutter
button, the display will turn on.
67
Before You Start
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be
reverted to their defaults.
1
Select [Clear all camera settings].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Clear all
camera settings], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 Setting [Clear all camera settings]
will reset the camera to the following
default settings:
Shooting Function Settings
<8> mode
F (Handheld Night Scene) HDR Mode
<v> mode
c (Miniature effect) Interval timer
AF operation
One-Shot AF
Bulb timer
AF area selection mode Auto selection:45 pt AF
Anti-flicker shooting
Metering mode
q (Evaluative metering) Mirror lockup
ISO speed settings
Viewfinder display
ISO Speed Setting Automatic setting (Auto)
Electronic level
Minimum: 100
Grid display
Range for stills
Flicker detection
Maximum: 16000
Minimum: 100
Custom Functions
Auto range
Maximum: 6400
Flash control
Flash firing
Minimum shutter
Auto
speed for auto
E-TTL II flash
metering
Drive mode
u (Single shooting)
Exposure
compensation/AEB Canceled
Flash exposure
compensation
Canceled
Multiple exposure Disable
68
Flash sync.
speed in Av
mode
Disable HDR
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Hide
Hide
Show
Unchanged
Enable
Evaluative flash
metering
Auto
Before You Start
Image Recording Settings
Image quality
73
Aspect ratio
3:2
Picture Style
Auto
Auto Lighting
Standard
Optimizer
Lens aberration correction
Enable / Correction
Peripheral
illumination correction data retained
1 min.
Enable
Enable
2 sec.
Disable
Disable
Off
Brightness
Disable
e (10 images)
OnzD
Q Auto
(Ambience priority)
Canceled
Date/Time/Zone
Unchanged
Canceled
Language
Unchanged
Canceled
Video system
Unchanged
sRGB
Feature guide
Enable
Chromatic aberration Enable / Correction
correction
data retained
Distortion
correction
White balance
Custom White
Balance
White balance
correction
White balance
bracketing
Color space
Long exposure
noise reduction
High ISO speed
noise reduction
Highlight tone priority
File numbering
Auto cleaning
Dust Delete Data
Camera Settings
Auto power off
Beep
Release shutter without card
Image review
Highlight alert
AF point display
Playback grid
Histogram display
Control over HDMI
Image jump w/6
Auto rotate
LCD brightness
LCD off/on button
Touch control
Disable / Correction
data retained
Disable
Standard
Disable
Continuous
Enable
Erased
Remains on
Standard
zbutton display All items
options
selected
5 (Quick
Control Dial) only
Custom shooting mode Unchanged
Copyright information Unchanged
Eye-Fi transmission Disable
Configure: MY MENU Unchanged
Menu display
Normal display
Wireless communication settings
Wi-Fi/NFC
Disable
Multi function lock
 For how to clear all the Custom Function settings, see page 410.
 Refer to the Wireless Function Instruction Manual for wireless function
settings.
69
Before You Start
Live View Shooting Settings
Live View shooting
AF method
AF operation
Touch shutter
Grid display
Exposure
simulation
Silent LV
shooting
Metering timer
Creative filters
Enable
u+Tracking
X
Disable
Hide
Enable
Mode 1
8 sec.
Disable
Movie Shooting Settings
<v> mode
l (Dream)
ISO speed settings
Minimum: 100
Range for
movies
Maximum: 12800
Movie Servo AF Enable
AF method
u+Tracking
Movie recording quality
MOV/MP4
MP4
NTSC:
L6 (Standard)
Movie
recording size PAL:
L5 (Standard)
Digital zoom
Disable
Sound
Auto
recording
Wind filter
Auto
Attenuator
Disable
Movie Servo AF speed
When active
Always on
AF speed
0 (Standard)
Movie Servo AF
tracking
0
sensitivity
Metering timer
Grid display
V button
function
Video snapshot
Time-lapse
movie
8 sec.
Hide
a/Disable
Disable
Remote control
Disable
shooting
Creative filters Disable
70
Displaying the Grid
You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt
or compose the shot.
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Grid display].
[Show].
3 Select
 When you exit the menu, the grid will
appear in the viewfinder.
You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and
before you start shooting a movie (p.270, 331).
71
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder to help you correct the camera tilt. Note that you can check
only the horizontal tilt and not the forward/backward tilt.
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor
1
Press the <B> button.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the screen display will
change.
 Display the electronic level.
 If the electronic level does not
appear, set [53: z button
display options] so that the
electronic level can be displayed
(p.450).
the camera’s tilt.
2 Check
 The horizontal tilt is displayed in 1°
Horizontal level
increments. The tilt scale is marked in
5° increments.
 When the red line turns green, it
indicates that the tilt is almost
corrected.
 Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.
±1°.
 If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be larger.
During Live View shooting and before movie shooting (except with u+Tracking),
you can also display the electronic level as described above (p.259, 301).
72
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder
A simple electronic level using a camera icon can be displayed in the
viewfinder. Since this indicator is displayed during shooting, you can
take the picture while checking the camera tilt.
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Electronic level].
3 Select [Show].
the shutter button halfway.
4 Press
 The electronic level will appear as
shown in the illustration.
Horizontal
Tilt 1°
Electronic level
Tilt 2° or higher
 This level also works with vertical
shooting.
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx. ±1°.
73
Displaying the Flicker DetectionN
If you set this function, <G> will appear in the viewfinder when
the camera detects flicker caused by the blinking of the light source. By
default, flicker detection is set to [Show].
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Flicker detection].
3 Select [Show].
If you set [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable], you can shoot with
reduced unevenness of exposure caused by the flicker (p.179).
74
Feature Guide and Help
The Feature guide and Help display information about camera features.
Feature Guide
The Feature guide appears when you change the shooting mode or set
a shooting function, Live View shooting, movie shooting, or Quick
Control for playback, and displays a brief description of that mode,
function or option. It also displays a description when you select a
function or option with Quick Control. The Feature guide turns off when
you tap on the description or proceed with the operation.
 Shooting mode (Sample)
 Quick Control (Sample)
Shooting settings
Live View shooting
Playback
3 Disabling the Feature Guide
Select [Feature guide].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Feature
guide], then press <0>.
 Select [Disable], then press <0>.
75
Feature Guide and Help
v Help
When [zHelp] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen,
pressing the <B> button displays the function’s description (Help). If
the Help fills more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right
edge. You can turn the <5> dial or press the <W> <X> keys to scroll.
 Example: [z3: Long exp. noise reduction]
B

Scroll bar
 Example: [8C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments]
B

 Example: [8C.Fn II-1: Tracking sensitivity]
B

76
2
Basic Shooting
This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes
on the Mode Dial for best results.
e
With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot, and the
camera sets everything automatically (p.107, 460). Also, to
prevent botched pictures due to misoperations, advanced
shooting function settings cannot be changed.
Ba s
ic
n
Zo
Before Shooting in the <8> or <v> Mode
When the LCD monitor is turned off, press the <Q> button or
<B> button (p.88, 101, 450) to check which shooting mode is
set before shooting.
* <8> : Special scene
* <v> : Creative filters
77
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus
automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.81).
1
Area AF frame
Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
 Turn the Mode Dial while holding
down the lock release button at the
center.
the Area AF frame over the
2 Aim
subject.
 All the AF points will be used to focus,
and the camera will focus on the
closest object.
 Aiming the center of the Area AF
frame over the subject will make
focusing easier.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway. The
lens elements will shift to focus.
 When achieving focus, the AF point
that has achieved focus will be
displayed. At the same time, the
beeper will sound and the focus
indicator <o> in the viewfinder will
light up.
 In low light, the AF point(s) will light
up briefly in red.
 If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised automatically.
Focus indicator
78
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed
for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
 After you finish shooting, push down
the built-in flash with your fingers.
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you do not obtain the desired color tones, change the
mode to a Creative Zone mode and select a Picture Style other than
<D>, then shoot again (p.154).
FAQ
 The focus indicator <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.
Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press
the shutter button halfway (p.50). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and try again.
 When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.
The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low-light
conditions.
 Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.
Focus has been achieved at all those points. You can take the
picture as long as an AF point covering the target subject is lighting
up.
79
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
 The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator <o>
does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The focus indicator <o> does not light up.) You can take
sharp pictures of a moving subject.
Note that the focus lock (p.81) will not work in this case.
 Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the
subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
 The flash fired even though it was daylight.
For a backlit subject, the flash may fire to help lighten the subject’s
dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, use the Quick Control
to set [Built-in flash firing] to [b] (p.106) or set the <7> (Flash
Off) mode and shoot (p.83).
 The built-in flash fired and the picture came out extremely
bright.
Move further away from the subject and shoot. When shooting with
flash, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture may come
out extremely bright (overexposure).
 In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.
Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to
fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called the AFassist beam. Its effective range is approx. 4 meters / 13.1 feet. The
built-in flash will make a sound when firing continuously. This is
normal and not a malfunction.
 When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out
unnaturally dark.
The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because
the subject was too close to the camera. Move further away from the
subject and shoot. If a hood is attached to the lens, remove it before
taking the flash picture.
80
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to
create a balanced background and good perspective.
In the <A> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a
still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot
while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the
shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone modes (except <5>
<C>).
Shooting a Moving Subject
In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
during or after focusing, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the
subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long
as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while
pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous.
When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.
81
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
A Live View Shooting
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 255.
the Live View shooting/Movie
1 Set
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image on
2 Display
the LCD monitor.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <0> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
You can also rotate the LCD monitor for different angles (p.40).
Normal angle
82
Low angle
High angle
7 Disabling Flash
The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings
automatically. In places where flash photography is prohibited such as
in a museum or an aquarium, use the <7> (Flash Off) mode.
Shooting Tips
 Prevent camera shake if the numeric display (shutter speed) in
the viewfinder blinks.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use a wide angle to reduce
blur caused by camera shake even with handheld shooting.
 Take portraits without flash.
In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is
taken. Any movement by the subject during shooting may result in
the subject being blurred in the picture.
83
C Creative Auto Shooting
In the <C> mode, you can set the following functions for shooting: (1)
Ambience-based shots, (2) Background blur, (3) Drive mode, and (4)
Built-in flash firing. The default settings are the same as the <A>
mode.
* CA stands for Creative Auto.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <C>.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired function.
3 Set
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select a function.
 The settings of the selected function
and Feature guide (p.75) will appear.
 For the setting procedure and details
on each function, see pages 85-87.
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
84
C Creative Auto Shooting
Shutter speed
Aperture
ISO speed
(3)
Battery level
Image-recording quality
(1)
(2)
(4)
Possible shots
If you set (1) or (2) when the camera is set for Live View shooting, you
can see the effect on the screen before you start shooting.
(1) Ambience-based shots
You can select and shoot with the ambience you want to convey in
your images. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the ambience.
You can also select it from a list by pressing <0>. For details, see
page 108.
85
C Creative Auto Shooting
(2) Background blur
• If [OFF] is set, the degree of background blur will change
depending on the brightness.
• If it is set to any setting other than [OFF], you can adjust the
background blur regardless of the brightness.
• If you turn the <6> or <5> dial to move the cursor to the right,
the background will look sharper.
• Turning the <6> or <5> dial to move the cursor to the left will
blur the subject’s background. Note that depending on the lens’s
maximum aperture (smallest f/number), certain slider adjustments
may not be selectable (indicated by •).
• If you use Live View shooting, you can see how the image is
blurred in front of and behind the point of focus. When you turn the
<6> or <5> dial, [Simulating blur] will be displayed on the
LCD monitor.
• If you want to blur the background, see “Shooting Portraits” on
page 95.
• Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background
may not look so blurred.
• This function cannot be set if you use flash. If <a> has been set
and you set background blur, <b> will be set automatically.
If [Simulating blur] is enabled during Live View shooting, the image
displayed with <g> (p.258) blinking may have more noise than the actual
image being recorded, or it may look dark.
86
C Creative Auto Shooting
(3) Drive mode: Use the <6> or <5> dial to make the selection. You
can also select it from a list by pressing <0>.
<u> Single shooting:
Shoot one image at a time.
<o> High-speed continuous shooting:
While you hold down the shutter button completely,
shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to
approx. 7.0 shots per second.
<i> Low-speed continuous shooting:
While you hold down the shutter button completely,
shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to
approx. 3.0 shots per second.
<B> Silent single shooting:
You can shoot one image at a time while suppressing
the camera noise during viewfinder shooting.
<M> Silent continuous shooting:
You can shoot up to approx. 3.0 shots per second
continuously while suppressing the camera noise
during viewfinder shooting.
<Q> Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control:
<k>Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control:
The picture is taken 10 seconds or 2 seconds after
you press the shutter button. A remote controller can
also be used.
(4) Built-in flash firing: Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the
desired setting. You can also select it from a list by pressing <0>.
<a> Auto built-in flash: The flash fires automatically when
necessary.
<I> Built-in flash on : The flash fires at all times.
<b> Built-in flash off : The flash is disabled.
 When using the self-timer, see the
notes on page 140.
 When using <b>, see “Disabling Flash” on page 83.
87
8: Special Scene Mode
The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when
you select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <8>.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
a shooting mode.
3 Select
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select the desired shooting
mode’s icon.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select
a shooting mode.
 You can also select the shooting
mode icon and press <0> to display
a selection of shooting modes from
which you can select one.
Available Shooting Modes in the <8> Mode
Page
Shooting Mode
P Food
Shooting Mode
p.89
G HDR Backlight Control
p.94
C Kids
p.90
2 Portrait
p.95
x Candlelight
p.91
3 Landscape
p.96
6 Night Portrait
p.92
4 Close-up
p.97
F Handheld Night Scene
p.93
5 Sports
p.98
88
Page
P Shooting Food
When shooting food, use <P> (Food). The photo will look bright and
appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the reddish tinge will be
suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.
Shooting Tips
 Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. To increase the food’s reddish tinge,
set it toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.
 Avoid using flash.
If you use flash, the light may reflect off the dish or food and results
in unnatural shadows. By default, <b> (Built-in flash off) is set. Try
to prevent camera shake when shooting in low-light conditions.
 Since this mode lets you shoot the food in appetizing color tones, human
subjects may be shot in an unsuitable skin tone.
 The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
 When multiple light sources are included on the screen, the warm color
cast of the picture may not be lessened.
 If you use flash, the [Color tone] setting will switch to the standard.
89
C Shooting Children
When you want to continuously focus on and shoot children running
around, use <C> (Kids). Skin tones will look healthy.
Shooting Tips
 Track the subject with the Area AF frame.
Press the shutter button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF
frame. During autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly.
If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> will blink.
 Shoot continuously.
The default setting is <o> (High-speed continuous shooting*).
When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button
completely. If you hold down the shutter button, you can shoot
continuously while maintaining autofocusing to capture changes in
the subject’s facial expression and movement.
* Viewfinder shooting: max. approx. 7.0 shots/sec., Live View shooting: max.
approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
 While the flash is recycling, “buSY” is displayed in the viewfinder and on
the LCD panel, and a picture cannot be taken. Take the picture after this
display turns off. During Live View shooting, “BUSY” is displayed on the
LCD monitor, and you cannot view the subject.
 See the cautions on page 99.
90
x Shooting Candlelight Portraits
When shooting a human subject in candlelight, use <x> (Candlelight).
The candlelight color tones will be retained in the photo.
Shooting Tips
 Use the center AF point to focus.
Aim the center AF point in the viewfinder over the subject, then shoot.
 Prevent camera shake if the numeric display (shutter speed) in
the viewfinder blinks.
Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the
viewfinder’s shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady
or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to
reduce blur caused by camera shake even while handholding the
camera.
 Change the color tone.
You can change [Color tone]. To increase the candlelight’s reddish
tinge, set it toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.
 Live View shooting cannot be used.
 The built-in flash will not fire. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be
emitted (p.119).
 If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.
91
6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)
To shoot people at night and obtain a natural-looking night scene in the
background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Using a tripod is
recommended.
Shooting Tips
 Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod.
When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide
night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
 Check the subject’s brightness.
Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a
good exposure of the subject.
It is recommended to play back the image after shooting to check
the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer and
shoot again.
 Also shoot in other shooting modes.
Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also
with <A> and <F> is recommended.
 Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires.
 If you use the self-timer together with flash, the self-timer lamp will light
up briefly after the picture is taken.
 See the cautions on page 99.
92
F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)
Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results.
However, the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot
night scenes even while handholding the camera. In this shooting
mode, four shots are taken continuously for each picture, and the
resulting one image with reduced camera shake is recorded.
Shooting Tips
 Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
four shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the four shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
 For shots of people, turn on the flash.
If you want to include people in the night scene shot, press the <Q>
button to set <D> (Built-in flash on). To take a nice portrait, the first
shot will use flash. Tell the subject not to move until all four
continuous shots are taken.
 Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.
 See the cautions on page 99.
93
G Shooting Backlit Scenes
When shooting a scene having both bright and dark areas, use the
<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this
mode, three continuous shots are taken at different exposures. This
results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the
clipped shadows caused by backlighting.
Shooting Tips
 Hold the camera firmly.
While shooting, hold the camera firmly and steadily. In this mode,
three shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if
there is significant misalignment in any of the three shots due to
camera shake, they may not align properly in the final image.
 Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.
 Flash shooting is not possible. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be
emitted (p.119).
 See the cautions on page 99.
HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
94
2 Shooting Portraits
The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human
subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.
Shooting Tips
 Select the location where the distance between the subject and
the background is the farthest.
The further the distance between the subject and background, the
more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand
out better against an uncluttered dark background.
 Use a telephoto lens.
If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to fill the frame with
the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary.
 Focus on the face.
Check that the AF point covering the face lights up. For close-ups of
the face, focus on the eyes.
The default setting is <i> (Low-speed continuous shooting). If you hold
down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously (max. approx. 3.0
shots/sec.) to capture changes in the subject’s facial expression and pose.
95
3 Shooting Landscapes
Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery or to have
everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and
very sharp and crisp images.
Shooting Tips
 With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.
When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens, objects near and far
will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth
to landscapes.
 Shooting night scenes.
The <3> mode is also good for night scenes because it disables
the built-in flash. When shooting night scenes, use a tripod to
prevent camera shake.
 The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.
 If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.
96
4 Shooting Close-ups
When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <4>
(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a
macro lens (sold separately).
Shooting Tips
 Use a simple background.
A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out
better.
 Move in as close as possible to the subject.
Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses
have indications such as <MACRO 0.39m/1.3ft> on them. The lens
minimum focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal
plane) mark on the top of the camera to the subject. If you are too
close to the subject, the focus indicator <o> will blink.
If you use the built-in flash and the bottom part of the picture comes
out unnaturally dark, move away from the subject and try again.
 With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.
If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the
subject look larger.
97
5 Shooting Moving Subjects
Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a
running person or a moving vehicle.
Shooting Tips
 Use a telephoto lens.
The use of a telephoto lens is recommended for shooting from a
distance.
 Track the subject with the Area AF frame.
Press the shutter button halfway to start autofocusing in Area AF
frame. During autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly.
If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> will blink.
The default setting is <o> (High-speed continuous shooting*).
When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button
completely. If you hold down the shutter button, you can shoot
continuously while maintaining autofocusing to capture changes in
the subject’s movement.
* Viewfinder shooting: max. approx. 7.0 shots/sec., Live View shooting: max.
approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
 The built-in flash will not fire even in backlit or low-light conditions.
 Under low light when camera shake tends to occur, the viewfinder’s shutter
speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera steady and shoot.
 If you are using an external Speedlite, the Speedlite will fire.
 During Live View shooting, the image quality can be set to 1 or JPEG.
If 41 or 61 is set, the image will be recorded in 1 quality.
98
Cautions for <C> Kids
 During Live View shooting, the image quality can be set to 1 or JPEG.
If 41 or 61 is set, the image will be recorded in 1 quality.
 During Live View shooting, if flash is fired in continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed will decrease. Even if the flash is not fired for
subsequent shots, shooting will be performed with the decreased
continuous shooting speed.
Cautions for <6> Night Portrait and <F> Handheld Night Scene
 During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus on dots of light
such as in a night scene. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode
switch to <MF> and focus manually.
 The Live View image displayed will not look exactly the same as the
actual image shot.
Cautions for <F> Handheld Night Scene and <G> HDR Backlight
Control
 You cannot select RAW or RAW+JPEG. If RAW is set, the image will be
recorded in the 73 quality. Also, if RAW+JPEG is set, the image will be
recorded in the set JPEG quality.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly
misaligned due to camera shake.
 It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged
after shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be
displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take
another picture until the processing is completed.
Cautions for <6> Night Portrait
 During Live View shooting, it may be difficult to focus when the face of
the subject looks dark. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF> and focus manually.
99
Cautions for <F> Handheld Night Scene
 When shooting with flash, if the subject is too close to the camera, the
picture may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
 If you use flash to shoot a night scene with few lights, the shots may not
align correctly. This can result in a blurry picture.
 If you use flash and the human subject is close to the background that is also
illuminated by the flash, the shots may not align correctly. This can result in a
blurry picture. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors may also appear.
 External flash coverage:
• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom
position will be fixed to the wide end, regardless of the lens’s zoom
position.
• When using a Speedlite requiring manual flash coverage setting, set
the flash head to the wide (normal) position.
Cautions for <G> HDR Backlight Control
 Note that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and
may look irregular or have significant noise.
 HDR Backlight Control may not be effective for excessively backlit
scenes or extremely high-contrast scenes.
 When shooting subjects that are sufficiently bright, for example for
normally lit scenes, the image may look unnatural because of the applied
HDR effect.
100
v Applying Creative Filters
In the <v> (Creative filter) mode, you can apply one of ten filter effects
(Grainy B/W*, Soft focus*, Fish-eye effect*, Toy camera effect*,
Miniature effect*, Water painting effect*, HDR art standard, HDR art
vivid, HDR art bold, and HDR art embossed) for shooting. When the
camera is set for Live View shooting, you can see the effect on the
screen before you start shooting. The camera saves only the image
with the Creative filter applied.
For the effects marked with an asterisk, you can also take a picture without a
Creative filter, then apply the effect afterward and save it as a new image (p.399).
1
Set the Mode Dial to <v>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
3 Display
 Press the <0> button to display the
Live View image.
[Creative filters] with Quick
4 Select
Control.
 Press the <Q> button (7).
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[c] on the upper left of the screen,
then press the <0> button.
101
v Applying Creative Filters
a shooting mode.
5 Select
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select a shooting mode, then
press <0> and select [OK].
 The image will be displayed with the
effects of the filter applied.
 For the Miniature effect, press the
<W> <X> keys to move the white
frame to where you want the image to
look sharp.
Available Shooting Modes in the v Mode
Shooting Mode
G
Page
Shooting Mode
Grainy B/W
p.103
Z
Water painting effect
Page
p.104
W
Soft focus
p.103
A HDR art standard
X
Fish-eye effect
p.104
B HDR art vivid
p.105
H
Toy camera effect
p.104
C HDR art bold
p.105
c
Miniature effect
p.104
D HDR art embossed
p.105
p.104
the effect.
6 Adjust
 Press the <Q> button and select the
icon below [Creative filters] (except
for c, A, B, C, and D).
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the filter effect, then press <0>.
the picture.
7 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <0> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and set [Creative filters].
102
v Applying Creative Filters
 You cannot select RAW or RAW+JPEG. If RAW is set, the image will be
recorded in the 73 quality. Also, if RAW+JPEG is set, the image will be
recorded in the set JPEG quality.
 When <G>, <W>, <X>, <H>, <c>, or <Z> is set, continuous
shooting cannot be set.
 Dust Delete Data (p.405) will not be appended to images shot with
Fish-eye effect applied.
 <c> is set to <b> (Flash Off) by default. Try to prevent camera shake
when shooting in low-light conditions.
During Live View Shooting
 With Grainy B/W, the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will look
different from the grainy effect recorded in the picture.
 With the Soft focus and Miniature effects, the blurred effect displayed on
the LCD monitor may look different from the blurred effect recorded in
the picture.
 The histogram is not displayed.
 Magnified view is not possible.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can set some Creative filters with Quick
Control (p.266).
Creative Filter Characteristics
 G Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
 W Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
103
v Applying Creative Filters
 X Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along the
periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter expands the
center part of the image, the resolution at the center may decrease
depending on the number of recorded pixels. Check the image on the
screen when setting this filter. The AF point will be fixed at center.
 H Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a color tone that makes it
look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the color cast
by adjusting the color tone.
 c Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect.
During Live View shooting, you can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 5, if you press the <u> button (or tap [T] on the
bottom right of the screen), you can switch between the white
frame’s vertical and horizontal orientations. The camera focuses on
the center of the white frame.
During viewfinder shooting, aim the center AF point over the subject
and shoot.
 Z Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that
night scenes or dark scenes may not be rendered with a smooth
gradation and may look irregular or have significant noise.
 A HDR art standard
Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced. The contrast will be
lower, and the gradation flatter to have the picture look like a
painting. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
For <A> <B> <C> <D>, clipped highlights and shadows will be
reduced for a high dynamic range of tones even with high-contrast scenes.
Three images of different exposures are captured continuously for
each shot and merged into a single image. See the cautions on page 105.
104
v Applying Creative Filters
 B HDR art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [HDR art standard], and
the low contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.
 C HDR art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and
the picture look like an oil painting.
 D HDR art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are
decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and
old. The subject outlines will have bolder bright (or dark) edges.
Cautions for <A> HDR Art Standard, <B> HDR Art Vivid, <C>
HDR Art Bold, and <D> HDR Art Embossed
 Compared to other shooting modes, the shooting range will be smaller.
 The Live View image displayed with the filter applied will not look exactly
the same as the actual image.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly
misaligned due to camera shake.
 If you are handholding the camera, try to prevent camera shake when
shooting.
 The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular exposure, irregular colors, or noise may appear.
 Shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color
reproduction of the illuminated areas.
 It takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged
after shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be
displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take
another picture until the processing is completed.
 Flash shooting is not possible. In low light, the AF-assist beam may be
emitted (p.119).
105
Q Quick Control
In Basic Zone modes, when the shooting function settings are
displayed, you can press the <Q> button to display the Quick Control
screen. The tables on the next page show the functions that can be set
with the Quick Control screen in each Basic Zone mode.
Example: Portrait mode
the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone
1 Set
mode.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired function.
3 Set
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select a function.
 The settings of the selected function
and Feature guide (p.75) will appear.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change the setting.
 You can also select from a list by
selecting a function and pressing
<0>.
106
Q Quick Control
Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes
o: Default setting*1 k: User selectable
Function
u: Single shooting
o: High-speed continuous shooting
Drive
mode
(p.138)
i: Low-speed continuous shooting
B: Silent single shooting*2
M: Silent continuous shooting*2
Self-timer (p.140)
Q
k
a: Automatic firing
Built-in
flash firing
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
b: Flash off
A 7
C
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
Ambience-based shots (p.108)
P
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
Light/scene-based shots (p.112)
k
Color tone (p.89, 91)
Function
G
u: Single shooting
o
o: High-speed continuous shooting k
i: Low-speed continuous shooting k
B: Silent single shooting*2
k
M: Silent continuous shooting*2 k
Q
k
Self-timer (p.140)
k
k
a: Automatic firing
Built-in
flash firing
D: Flash on (Fires at all times)
b: Flash off
Ambience-based shots (p.108)
Light/scene-based shots (p.112)
Adjustment of effects (p.101)
C
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
8
x
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
6
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
F
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
Background blur (p.86)
Drive
mode
(p.138)
: Not selectable
o
2
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
8
3
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
4
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
5
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
c
o
v
*3
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
o
k
k
*4
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
*1: If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, all the
functions will revert to the default settings (except the self-timer).
*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.
*3: GWXHZ
*4: ABCD
107
Shooting with Ambience Selection
In Basic Zone modes, when a mode other than <A>, <7>,
<8: G>, and <v> is set, you can select the ambience for shooting.
Ambience
1 Standard setting
2 Vivid
3 Soft
4 Warm
5 Intense
6 Cool
7 Brighter
8 Darker
9 Monochrome
C
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
P/x
k
k
k
k
1
8
C/6/F/2/3/
4/5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Ambience Effect
No setting
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Standard / Strong
Low / Medium / High
Low / Medium / High
Blue / B/W / Sepia
Set the Mode Dial to <C> or <8>.
 For <8>, set a shooting mode
other than <G>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
3 Display
 Press the <0> button to display the
Live View image (except <x>).
Quick Control, select the
4 With
desired ambience.
 Press the <Q> button (7).
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[1 Standard setting]. [Ambiencebased shots] will appear on the
screen.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired ambience.
 The LCD monitor will display how the
image will look with the selected
ambience.
108
Shooting with Ambience Selection
the ambience effect.
5 Set
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the effect so that [Effect] appears at
the bottom of the screen.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired effect.
the picture.
6 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <0> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
 If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [1
Standard setting].
 The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not
look exactly the same as the actual image.
 Using flash may reduce the ambience effect.
 In bright outdoors, the Live View image you see on the LCD monitor may
not have exactly the same brightness or ambience as the actual image.
Set [52: LCD brightness] to 4, and look at the Live View image so that
the LCD monitor is unaffected by outside light.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and set [Ambience-based
shots] and [Effect].
109
Shooting with Ambience Selection
Ambience Settings
1Standard setting
Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode.
Note that <2> has image characteristics geared for portraits and
<3> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of
the respective shooting mode’s image characteristics.
2 Vivid
The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more
impressive than with [1 Standard setting].
3 Soft
The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets,
flowers, etc.
4 Warm
The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits,
pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look.
5 Intense
While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is
emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living
subject stand out more.
6 Cool
The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A
subject in the shade will look more calm and impressive.
110
Shooting with Ambience Selection
7 Brighter
The picture will look brighter.
8 Darker
The picture will look darker.
9 Monochrome
The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome
color to be blue, black and white, or sepia. When [Monochrome] is
selected, <z> will appear in the viewfinder.
111
Shooting by Lighting or Scene Type
In the <8: C2345> Basic Zone modes, you can shoot with
the settings matching the lighting or scene type. Normally, [e Default
setting] is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting condition or
scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eyes.
For Live View shooting, if you set both [Light/scene-based shots] and
[Ambience-based shots] (p.108), you should first set [Light/scenebased shots]. This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the
LCD monitor.
Lighting or Scene
8
C
2
3
4
e Default setting
k
k
k
k
5
k
f Daylight
k
k
k
k
k
g Shade
k
k
k
k
k
S Cloudy
k
k
k
k
k
i Tungsten light
k
k
k
k
j Fluorescent light
k
k
k
k
s Sunset
k
k
k
k
k
1
Set the Mode Dial to <8>.
 Set one of the following: <C>, <2>,
<3>, <4>, or <5>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
3 Display
 Press the <0> button to display the
Live View image.
112
Shooting by Lighting or Scene Type
Quick Control, select the
4 With
lighting or scene type.
 Press the <Q> button (7).
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[e Default setting]. [Light/scenebased shots] will appear on the
screen.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the lighting or scene type.
 The resulting image with the selected
lighting or scene type will be
displayed.
the picture.
5 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 To return to viewfinder shooting,
press the <0> button to exit Live
View shooting. Then press the shutter
button completely to take the picture.
 If you change the shooting mode or
set the power switch to <2>, the
setting will revert back to [e Default
setting].
 If you use flash, the setting will switch to [e Default setting]. (However,
the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that is set.)
 If you want to set this together with [Ambience-based shots], set the
lighting or scene type that best matches the ambience you have set. In
the case of [Sunset], for example, warm colors will become prominent so
the ambience you set may not work well.
If you do not want the Live View image to be displayed when setting
functions, press the <Q> button after step 1 and set [Light/scene-based
shots].
113
Shooting by Lighting or Scene Type
Lighting or Scene Type Settings
eDefault setting
Default setting suited for most subjects.
fDaylight
For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies
and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better.
gShade
For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones, which may look
too bluish, and for light-colored flowers.
SCloudy
For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and
landscapes, which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day, look
warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers.
iTungsten light
For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange
color cast caused by tungsten lighting.
jFluorescent light
For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of
fluorescent lighting.
sSunset
Suitable when you want to capture the sunset’s impressive colors.
114
3
Setting the AF and
Drive Modes
The AF points in the viewfinder are
arranged to make AF shooting
suitable for a wide variety of
subjects and scenes.
You can also select the AF operation and drive mode
that best match the shooting conditions and subject.
 The O icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
 In Basic Zone modes, the AF operation and AF point (AF
area selection mode) are set automatically.
<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.
115
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation
is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <AF>.
the Mode Dial to a Creative
2 Turn
Zone mode.
3 Press the <f> button (9).
the AF operation.
4 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
X : One-Shot AF
9 : AI Focus AF
Z : AI Servo AF
In Creative Zone modes, you can also press the <p> button to
autofocus.
116
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you
press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
that achieved focus will be displayed,
and the focus indicator <o> in the
viewfinder will also light up.
 With evaluative metering, the
AF point
exposure setting will be set at the
Focus indicator
same time focus is achieved.
 While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
 If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder
will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter
button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot or see “When
Autofocus Fails” (p.136) and try to focus again.
 If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus
is achieved.
 After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a
subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is useful
when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered by the Area
AF frame.
 When a lens equipped with electronic manual focusing function is used,
after achieving focus, you can focus manually by turning the lens
focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway.
117
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.
 The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
 When the AF area selection mode (p.120) is set to 45-point
automatic selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the
Area AF frame covers the subject.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically
AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.
 After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts
moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF
operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving
subject.
When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,
the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus indicator <o> in
the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be locked in this case.
118
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AF Points Lighting Up in Red
By default, the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in lowlight conditions. In Creative Zone modes, you can set whether to have
the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved (p.424).
AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash
Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,
the built-in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes. This illuminates the
subject to help autofocusing.
 AF-assist beam will not be emitted from the built-in flash in <7> or
<8: C35> modes, or when [Built-in flash firing] is set to <b>
in <A>, <C>, <8: PF24>, or <v: GWXHcZ> modes.
 The AF-assist beam will not be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.
 The built-in flash makes a sound when firing continuously. This is normal
and not a malfunction.
 The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is
approx. 4 meters / 13.1 feet.
 In Creative Zone modes, when you raise the built-in flash with the <I>
button, the AF-assist beam will fire when necessary. Note that depending
on the setting for [8C.Fn II-6: AF-assist beam firing], the AF-assist
beam may not be emitted (p.419).
119
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
The camera has 45 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF
area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable
AF points, AF point patterns, the shape of Area AF frame, etc. will
differ. For details, see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 128.
AF Area Selection Mode
You can select one of four AF area selection modes. See the next page
for the selection procedure.
E: Single-point AF
(Manual selection)
Select one AF point to focus.
F: Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
The AF area is divided into nine focusing
zones for focusing.
G: Large Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
The AF area is divided into three
focusing zones (left, center, and right) for
focusing.
H: 45-point automatic selection
AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is
used to focus.
120
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode
1
Press the <S> or <B> button
(9).
 Look through the viewfinder and
press the <S> or <B> button.
the <B> button.
2 Press
 Each time you press the <B>
AF area selection mode
button, the AF area selection mode
changes.
 The AF area selection mode currently
set is indicated on the top of the
viewfinder.
 With [8C.Fn II-8: Select AF area selec. mode], you can limit the
selectable AF area selection modes (p.420).
 If you set [8C.Fn II-9: AF area selection method] to [1: S9Main
Dial], you can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the <S>
or <B> button, then turning the <6> dial (p.420).
121
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
Selecting the AF Point Manually
You can manually select the AF point or zone.
1
Press the <S> or <B> button
(9).
 The AF points will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
 In the Zone AF mode or Large Zone
AF mode, the selected zone will be
displayed.
an AF point.
2 Select
 The AF point selection will change in
the direction you tilt <9>. If you
press <0>, the center AF point (or
center zone) will be selected.
<6>
<5>
 You can also select an AF point by
shifting horizontally with the <6>
dial or vertically with the <5> dial.
 In the Zone AF mode, turning the
<6> or <5> dial will change the
zone in a looping sequence.
 When you hold down the <Q> button and turn the <6> dial, you can
select an AF point by shifting vertically.
 When [8C.Fn II-11: Initial AFpt, o AI Servo AF] is set to [1: Initial
o AF pt selected] (p.422), you can use this method to manually select
the AI Servo’s AF initial position.
 When you press the <S> or <B> button, the LCD panel displays the
following:
• Zone AF, Large Zone AF, and 45-point automatic selection AF: M AF
• 1 pt AF: SEL N (Center)/SEL AF (Off-center)
122
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
AF Point Display Indications
Pressing the <S> or <B> button lights up the AF points that are
cross-type AF points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF
points are horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see
pages 127-131.
123
AF Area Selection Modes
S Single-point AF (Manual Selection)
Select one AF point <S> to be used for focusing.
m Zone AF (Manual Selection of Zone)
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing. All the AF
points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point
selection. It is superior to single-point AF in tracking the subject, and it
is effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
n Large Zone AF (Manual Selection of Zone)
The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right)
for focusing. Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF and all
the AF points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point
selection, it is superior to single-point AF in tracking the subject, and it is
effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
124
AF Area Selection Modes
o 45-point Automatic Selection AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. This mode is set
automatically in Basic Zone modes (except <8: x> and <v:
Xc>).
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button
halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> that
achieved focus. If multiple AF points are
displayed, it means they all have achieved focus.
This mode tends to focus on the nearest subject.
With AI Servo AF, you can set the AI Servo AF’s
starting position with [8C.Fn II-11: Initial AFpt,
o AI Servo AF] (p.422). As long as the Area AF
frame can track the subject during shooting,
focusing will continue.
 When AI Servo AF mode is set with 45-point automatic selection AF,
Large Zone AF, or Zone AF, the active AF point <S> will keep switching
to track the subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as
when the subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject.
 If a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle lens is used, achieving focus may
be difficult with an EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.
In such a case, use an AF point closer to the center.
 When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in
red. This is a characteristic of AF point display.
 In low temperatures, the AF point’s display may be difficult to see. This is
a characteristic of AF point display. Also, the tracking response may
become slower.
With [8C.Fn II -10: Orientation linked AF point], you can set the AF area
selection mode + AF point, or only the AF point separately for the horizontal
and vertical orientations (p.421).
125
AF Area Selection Modes
AF Using Color Tracking
By default, AF will be performed based on color tracking.
When the AF area selection mode is set to Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or
45-point automatic selection AF, focus is achieved as follows:
 In One-Shot AF Mode
Focusing on a still human subject in the AF area is made easier.
 In AI Servo AF Mode
Focusing on a human subject in the AF area is made easier. If no skin
tones can be detected, the nearest subject will be focused on. Once focus
is achieved, AF points are automatically selected so that the camera
continues to focus on the color of the area it focused on first.
* In [8C.FnII-12 Auto AF pt sel.:Color Tracking], you can set whether to perform
AF by tracking colors. If [1: Disable] is set, focus is achieved based only on AF
information (p.422).
126
AF Sensor
The camera’s AF sensor has 45 AF points. The illustration below shows
the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. When using
lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster, high-precision AF is
possible with the center AF point in the viewfinder.
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable
AF points, AF point patterns, the shape of Area AF frame, etc. vary. For
details, see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 128.
Diagram
Cross-type focusing: f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal
(also compatible with some f/8 lenses)
Dual cross-type focusing:
f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagonal
f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal
(also compatible with f/8 lenses)
The focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher precision
focusing for lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or
faster. A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus on
subjects difficult for AF. It is provided at the center AF point.
The focusing sensor is geared for lenses with a maximum
aperture of f/5.6 or faster (and some f/8 lenses). Since it
has a horizontal pattern, it can detect vertical lines. It
covers all 45 AF points.
The focusing sensor is geared for lenses with a maximum
aperture of f/5.6 or faster (and some f/8 lenses). Since it
has a vertical pattern, it can detect horizontal lines. It
covers all 45 AF points.
127
Lenses and Usable AF Points
 Although the camera has 45 AF points, the number of usable AF
points and focusing patterns vary depending on the lens. The
lenses are thereby classified into eight groups from A to H.
 When using a lens in Groups E to H, fewer AF points will be usable.
 See which group each lens belongs to on pages 132-135. Check
which group the lens in use belongs to.
 The number of available AF points varies depending on aspect ratio
settings (p.146).
 When you press the <S> or <B> button, the AF points indicated by
the
mark will blink. (The / AF points will stay lit.) Regarding
lighting up or blinking of the AF points, see page 123.
 For the latest “Lens Group Designations” information, check the Canon
Web site.
 Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.
Group A
Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
128
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group B
Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
Group C
Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Group D
Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
129
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group E
Autofocusing with only 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45
AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During
automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area
(Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group F
Autofocusing with only 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45
AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During
automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area
(Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to vertical lines
(AF points in the horizontal array at
the top and bottom) or horizontal
lines (AF points in a vertical array on
the left and right).
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
130
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group G
Autofocusing with only 27 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45
AF points.) Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone) cannot be
selected for AF area selection mode. During automatic AF point
selection, the outer frame marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be
different from 45-point automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group H
Autofocusing is possible only with the center AF point.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
 If the maximum aperture is slower than f/5.6 (greater than f/5.6 but not
exceeding f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting lowcontrast or low-light subjects.
 If the maximum aperture is slower than f/8 (greater than f/8), AF is not
possible during viewfinder shooting.
131
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Lens Group Designations
EF-S24mm f/2.8 STM
EF-S60mm f/2.8 Macro USM
EF-S10-18mm f/4.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S10-22mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF-S17-55mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF-S17-85mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 III
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS
EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM
EF14mm f/2.8L USM
EF14mm f/2.8L II USM
EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye
EF20mm f/2.8 USM
EF24mm f/1.4L USM
EF24mm f/1.4L II USM
EF24mm f/2.8
EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF28mm f/1.8 USM
EF28mm f/2.8
EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF35mm f/1.4L USM
EF35mm f/1.4L II USM
EF35mm f/2
EF35mm f/2 IS USM
EF40mm f/2.8 STM
132
A
B
D
B
B
A
B
C
C
C
C
B
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
EF50mm f/1.0L USM
EF50mm f/1.2L USM
EF50mm f/1.4 USM
EF50mm f/1.8
EF50mm f/1.8 II
EF50mm f/1.8 STM
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
+ LIFE SIZE Converter
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF85mm f/1.8 USM
EF100mm f/2 USM
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM
EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus)
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
A
A
A
A
B
E
B
A
A
B
A
B
F
A
A*
B*
A
A
B
A
B
B
A
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L USM
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
B
B
A
B*
B*
A
B
B
A
B
B
B
B
H (f/8)
B
B
H (f/8)
A
B*
B*
A
B*
B*
A
B
B
A
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L USM
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
B
B
B
B
H (f/8)
B
B
H (f/8)
B
H (f/8)
B
B
H (f/8)
B
B
H (f/8)
B
H (f/8)*
B
B*
H (f/8)*
B
B
H (f/8)
B
B
H (f/8)
E
133
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM
EF11-24mm f/4L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L III USM
EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM
EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF17-40mm f/4L USM
EF20-35mm f/2.8L
EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM
EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS II USM
EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6
134
H (f/8)
E
H (f/8)*
B
C
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
C
F
A
A
B
D
B
B
B
A
E
E
B
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
F
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III
EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM
EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
F
B
B
B
B
E
E
F
E
F
E
F
B
H
H
B
C
D
E
B
B
D
D
A
B**
B**
A
B
B
A
B
B
B
B
H (f/8)
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x I/II/III
EF70-210mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF70-210mm f/4
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF80-200mm f/2.8L
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF100-200mm f/4.5A
EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
B
B
H (f/8)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
B
B
B
B
B
A
D
E
E
D
D
B
C
EF100-300mm f/5.6
EF100-300mm f/5.6L
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x III
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM
Extender 1.4x: With built-in Ext.1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x: With built-in Ext.1.4x
+ Extender EF1.4x I/II/III
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x + Extender EF2x I/II
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x + Extender EF2x III
TS-E17mm f/4L
TS-E24mm f/3.5L
TS-E24mm f/3.5L II
TS-E45mm f/2.8
TS-E90mm f/2.8
B
B
B
H (f/8)
B
H (f/8)
G (f/8)
B
B
B
H (f/8)
H (f/8)
G (f/8)
B
B
B
A
A
 If Extender EF2x (I/II/III) is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
lens, AF is not possible.
 When using a lens and Extender EF1.4x III/EF2x III in a combination
marked with an asterisk (*) or when using a lens and extender in a
combination marked with two asterisks (**), precise focus may not be
achieved with AF. In such a case, refer to the Instruction Manual of the
lens or extender used.
If you use a TS-E lens, manual focusing will be required. The lens group
designation of TS-E lenses applies only when you do not use tilt or shift
function.
135
When Autofocus Fails
Autofocus may fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus indicator <o>
blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
Subjects Difficult to Focus
 Subjects with very low contrast
(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)
 Subjects in very low light
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects
(Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)
 Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point
(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)
 Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point
(Example: Night scenes, etc.)
 Subjects with repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
In such a case, focus by doing either of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus, then recompose the shot (p.81).
(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually
(p.137).
 Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly
recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.
 Conditions that make focusing difficult with AF during Live View shooting
or movie shooting are listed on page 284.
136
When Autofocus Fails
MF: Manual Focus
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
 <4 L> will be displayed on the
LCD panel.
Focusing ring
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Focus by turning the lens’s focusing
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
 If you press the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF
point that achieved focus and the focus indicator <o> will light up in the
viewfinder.
 With 45-point automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves
focus, the focus indicator <o> will light up.
137
i Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided.
1
Press the <R> button (9).
the drive mode.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
u : Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will
be taken.
o: High-speed continuous shooting (Max. approx. 7.0 shots/sec.*)
While you hold down the shutter button completely, the camera
will shoot continuously.
* During Live View shooting or when [Servo AF] is set, the maximum
speed will be max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
i : Low-speed continuous shooting (Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.)
While you hold down the shutter button completely, the camera
will shoot continuously.
B : Silent single shooting
You can shoot one image at a time while suppressing the camera
noise during viewfinder shooting.
M : Silent continuous shooting (Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.)
You can shoot continuously while suppressing the camera noise
during viewfinder shooting.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer/remote control
k: 2-sec. self-timer/remote control
For self-timer shooting, see page 140. For remote control
shooting, see page 221.
138
i Selecting the Drive Mode
 o: The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 7.0 shots/sec.
is attained under the following conditions*: 1/500 sec. or faster shutter
speed, maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens), Anti-flicker
shooting set to Disable, with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, and at
room temperature (23°C/73°F). The continuous shooting speed may
become slower depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject
conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, temperature, battery type,
remaining battery level, etc.
* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off
when using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.55.6 IS USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS
USM.
 If <B> or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter
button completely until the picture is taken will be slightly longer than
normal.
 With Live View shooting, <B> and <M> cannot be set.
 The continuous shooting speed may become slower if the remaining
battery level is low or if you shoot under low-light conditions.
 In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately) with AA/R6 batteries,
the high-speed continuous shooting speed may be slower.
 If you set [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable] (p.179) and shoot under
a flickering light source, the continuous shooting speed may decrease
slightly, the shooting interval may become irregular, or the release time
lag may become longer.
 When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed may drop since shooting will be temporarily
disabled (p.145).
139
j Using the Self-timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture.
1 Press the <R> button (9).
the self-timer.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial to select the
self-timer delay.
Q : Shoot in approx. 10 sec.
k : Shoot in approx. 2 sec.
the picture.
3 Take
 Look through the viewfinder, focus on
the subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
 You can check the self-timer
operation with the self-timer lamp,
beeper, and countdown display (in
seconds) on the LCD panel.
 2 sec. before the picture is taken, the
self-timer lamp will light up and the
beeper will sound faster.
If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,
attach the eyepiece cover (p.220). If stray light enters the viewfinder when
the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
 The <k> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera
mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera vibration blur when you shoot
still lifes or long exposures.
 After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.346) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
 When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.81) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
 To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either touch the LCD monitor or
press the <R> button.
140
4
Image Settings
This chapter explains image-related function settings:
Image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, white
balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction, lens
aberration correction, anti-flicker shooting, and other
functions.
 In Basic Zone modes, only the following can be set as
described in this chapter: Image-recording quality, folder
creation and selection, and image file numbering.
 The O icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
141
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are eight JPEG
image-recording quality settings: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, b, c.
There are three RAW image quality settings: 1, 41, 61 (p.144).
1
Select [Image quality].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
the image-recording quality.
2 Set
 To select a RAW setting, turn the
<6> dial. To select a JPEG setting,
press the <Y> <Z> keys.
 On the upper right of the screen,
“***M (megapixels) ****x****”
indicates the recorded pixel count,
and [***] is the number of possible
shots (displayed up to 999).
 Press <0> to set it.
Image-recording Quality Setting Examples
73 only
1 only
1+73
61+74
The image size [****x****] and number of possible shots [***] for the [3:2]
aspect ratio will always be displayed on the image-recording quality setting
screen regardless of the [z4: Aspect ratio] setting (p.146).
If [–] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 73 will be set.
142
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.)
Image
Quality
73
83
74
JPEG
84
7a
Pixels Printing
Recorded
Size
24M
A2
11M
A3
File Size
(MB)
Possible
Maximum Burst
Shots
7.6
940
77 (110)
3.9
1800
120 (120)
4.1
1730
140 (140)
2.0
3430
140 (140)
2.6
2700
140 (140)
1.3
5260
150 (150)
5.9M
A4
b*1
2.5M
9x13 cm
1.3
5260
150 (150)
c*2
0.3M
-
0.3
20180
150 (150)
1
20 (25)
8a
24M
A2
28.9
240
RAW 41
14M
A3
22.8
300
21 (26)
61
6.0M
A4
15.9
440
27 (28)
1
73
24M
24M
A2
A2
28.9+7.6
190
20 (22)
RAW
41
14M
A3
+
22.8+7.6
220
73
24M
A2
JPEG
61
6.0M
A4
15.9+7.6
300
73
24M
A2
*1 :b is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame.
*2 :c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a Web site.
20 (22)
22 (22)
 b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.
 The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting
are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and
Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB card. These figures will vary
depending on the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture
Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.
 The maximum burst applies to <o> high-speed continuous shooting.
Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I class 16 GB card based on Canon’s
testing standards.
Even if you use a UHS-I class card, the maximum burst indicator will not
change. The maximum burst in parentheses in the table will apply instead.
143
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
 If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded
simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the imagerecording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with
the same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for
RAW).
 The image-recording quality icons are as follows: 1 (RAW), 41
(Middle RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG, 7 (Fine), 8 (Normal), 3
(Large), 4 (Middle), 6 (Small).
RAW Images
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to
digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the
quality as follows: 1, 41, or 61.
A 1 image can be processed with [31: RAW image processing]
(p.390) and saved as a JPEG image. (41 and 61 images cannot
be processed with the camera.) As the RAW image itself does not
change, you can process the RAW image to create any number of
JPEG images with various processing conditions.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.512) to
process RAW images. You can make various adjustments to images
depending upon how they will be used and generate JPEG, TIFF, or
other types of images reflecting the effects of those adjustments.
RAW Image Processing Software
 To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
 Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken
with this camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your
computer, obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon
Web site to update it (p.512). (The previous version will be overwritten.)
Note that DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot process RAW images taken with
this camera.
 Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW
images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the
software manufacturer.
144
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst is
displayed on the bottom right in the
viewfinder and on the shooting function
settings screen.
If the maximum burst for continuous
shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be
displayed.
The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the
camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower
and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled temporarily.
If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all
the captured images are written to the card, you can resume continuous
shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on page 143.
145
3 Changing the Image’s Aspect RatioN
You can change the image’s aspect ratio. [3:2] is set by default. When
[4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] is set, frame lines indicating the shooting area will
be displayed in the viewfinder. During Live View shooting, the image
appears with the surrounding area masked in black on the LCD monitor.
1
Select the aspect ratio.
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Aspect
ratio], then press <0>.
the aspect ratio.
2 Set
 Select an aspect ratio, then press
<0>.
 JPEG images
The images will be saved with the set aspect ratio.
 RAW images
The images will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. The
selected aspect ratio information is added to the RAW image file.
When you process the RAW image with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software), this allows you to generate an image with the same
aspect ratio set for shooting. In the case of the [4:3], [16:9], and [1:1]
aspect ratios, the lines to indicate the aspect ratio will appear during
image playback, but they are not actually drawn on the captured
image.
The [z4: Aspect ratio] setting does not work with multiple exposures.
146
3 Changing the Image’s Aspect RatioN
The table below shows the aspect ratio and the number of recorded
pixels for each image-recording quality.
Image
Quality
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
3
6000x4000
5328x4000*
6000x3368*
4000x4000
(24.0 megapixels) (21.3 megapixels) (20.2 megapixels) (16.0 megapixels)
4
3984x2656
3552x2664
3984x2240*
2656x2656
(10.6 megapixels) (9.5 megapixels) (8.9 megapixels) (7.1 megapixels)
a
2976x1984
2656x1992
2976x1680*
1984x1984
(5.9 megapixels) (5.3 megapixels) (5.0 megapixels) (3.9 megapixels)
b
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
c
720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
(0.35 megapixels) (0.31 megapixels) (0.29 megapixels) (0.23 megapixels)
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
(2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
 The items marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the indicated
aspect ratio.
 The shooting area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio may be
slightly different from the actual shooting area. Check the captured
images on the LCD monitor during shooting.
 If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this
camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.
147
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set
automatically (p.150).
Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 296 and
299.
1
Press the <i> button (9).
the ISO speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> or
<5> dial.
 ISO speed can be set within ISO 100
- ISO 16000 in 1/3-stop increments.
 “A” indicates ISO Auto. The ISO
speed will be set automatically
(p.150).
 When the screen shown on the left is
displayed, you can press the <B>
button to set it to “AUTO”.
ISO Speed Guide
ISO Speed
Shooting Situation
(No flash)
ISO 100 - ISO 400
Sunny outdoors
ISO 400 - ISO 1600
Overcast skies or
evening time
ISO 1600 - ISO 16000, H
Dark indoors or night
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
148
Flash Range
The higher the ISO speed,
the farther the effective flash
range will extend.
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
 As “H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) is an expanded ISO speed setting,
noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular colors will be more
noticeable, and the resolution will be lower compared with the standard
setting.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], ISO 100/125/160 and
“H” (equivalent to ISO 25600) cannot be selected (p.174).
 Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
 If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
You can expand the settable ISO speed range up to ISO 25600 (H)equivalent with [Range for stills] under [z2: ISO speed settings]
(p.151).
149
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the
actual ISO speed setting will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway. As indicated below, the
ISO speed will be set automatically to
suit the shooting mode.
Shooting Mode
A7Cv
PCx6G245
8 F
3
ISO Speed Setting
No Flash
ISO 100 - ISO 6400
ISO 100 - ISO 12800
ISO 100 - ISO 1600
d, s, f, a
ISO 100 - ISO 16000*1
With bulb exposures
ISO 400*1
With Flash
ISO 400*1*2
(Except in the A, C,
<8: C6F>,
<v: GWXHcZ>
modes.)
*1: The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum]
settings set in [Auto range] (p.152).
*2: (1) If fill-in flash will cause overexposure, ISO speed may be reduced, down to
a possible minimum of ISO 100.
(2) In <8: Px2345> and <d> modes, if you use bounce flash with
an external Speedlite, the ISO speed will be automatically set within ISO
400 - ISO 1600.
150
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
3 Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range
You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and
maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 to ISO
16000, and the maximum limit within ISO 200 to H (equivalent to ISO
25600).
1
Select [ISO speed settings].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [ISO
speed settings], then press <0>.
2 Select [Range for stills].
the minimum limit.
3 Set
 Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
4 Set
 Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
5 Select [OK].
151
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO 100
- ISO 16000. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO 12800,
and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - ISO 16000 in 1-stop
increments.
1
Select [Auto range].
the minimum limit.
2 Set
 Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
3 Set
 Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
4 Select [OK].
The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also be applied to the ISO
speed safety shift’s minimum and maximum ISO speeds (p.415).
152
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN
3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto
You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set
automatically will not be too slow when ISO Auto is set.
This is useful in the <d> and <f> modes when you use a wide-angle
lens to shoot a moving subject or when you use a telephoto lens. It
helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.
1
Automatically set
Manually set
Select [Min. shutter spd.].
the desired minimum shutter
2 Set
speed.
 Select [Auto] or [Manual].
 If you select [Auto], turn the <6>
dial to set the desired speed, slower
or faster, compared to the standard
speed, then press <0>.
 If you select [Manual], turn the <6>
dial to select the shutter speed, then
press <0>.
 If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed
limit set with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter
spd.] will be set to obtain a standard exposure.
 This function will not be applied to flash and movie shooting.
When [Auto: 0] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of
the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to
a single shutter speed stop.
153
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
In Basic Zone modes, [D] (Auto) is set automatically. (In <v>
modes, [P] (Standard) is set.)
1
Select [Picture Style].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
a Picture Style.
2 Select
 Select a Picture Style, then press
<0>.
 The Picture Style will be set.
Picture Style Characteristics
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets,
particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.157), you can adjust the skin tone.
154
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
u Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject.
The colors will be slightly vivid.
S Neutral
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with
their computer. For natural colors and subdued images with modest
brightness and color saturation.
U Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a
subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K
will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For
subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be turned into color. Be
careful not to leave the [Monochrome] setting on when you want to shoot
photos in color again.
You can display <z> in the viewfinder when [Monochrome] is set (p.425).
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.160). Any User
Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same
default settings as the [Auto] Picture Style.
155
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Symbols
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness],
or [Threshold] of [Sharpness], [Contrast], and other parameters. The
numerals indicate the set values for these parameters set for the
respective Picture Style.
Symbols
Sharpness
g
J
Strength
K
Fineness
L
Threshold
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter effect (Monochrome)
l
Toning effect (Monochrome)
During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and
[Threshold] of [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be
applied to movies.
156
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
You can customize the Picture Styles. You can change or adjust the
parameter settings of Picture Styles such as [Strength], [Fineness], or
[Threshold] of [Sharpness], and [Contrast], and other parameters
from the default settings. To see the resulting effects, take test shots. To
customize [Monochrome], see page 159.
1
Select [Picture Style].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
a Picture Style.
2 Select
 Select a Picture Style, then press the
<B> button.
a parameter.
3 Select
 Select the parameter (such as
[Sharpness] - [Strength]) to be set,
then press <0>.
 The settings and effects are
explained on page 158.
the parameter.
4 Set
 Adjust the parameter as desired, then
press <0>.
157
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
 Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
 Any parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.
Parameter Settings and Effects
Sharpness
g
J Strength
0: Less sharp outline
K Fineness*1
1: Fine
5: Grainy
L Threshold*2
1: Low
5: High
7: Sharp outline
h Contrast
-4: Low contrast
+4: High contrast
i Saturation
-4: Low saturation
+4: High saturation
j Color tone
-4: Reddish skin tone
+4: Yellowish skin tone
*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the
number, the finer the outlines that can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the
more the outline with low contrast difference can be emphasized. However,
noise tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.
 During movie playback, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness]
cannot be set (these menu items are not displayed).
 By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter
settings of the respective Picture Style to their defaults.
 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted
Picture Style, then shoot.
158
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
V Monochrome Adjustment
Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as
[Contrast], or [Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] of [Sharpness],
you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect].
k Filter effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
Sample Effects
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
l Toning effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in the
selected color. Effective when you want
to create more impressive images.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple], or
[G:Green].
159
A Registering a Picture StyleN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].
You can create multiple Picture Styles with different settings.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered
to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.512).
1
Select [Picture Style].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture
Style], then press <0>.
[User Def. *].
2 Select
 Select [User Def. *], then press the
<B> button.
<0>.
3 Press
 With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
the base Picture Style.
4 Select
 Select the base Picture Style, then
press <0>.
 To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that is registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software),
select the Picture Style here.
160
A Registering a Picture StyleN
a parameter.
5 Select
 Select the parameter (such as
[Sharpness] - [Strength]) to be set,
then press <0>.
the parameter.
6 Set
 Adjust the parameter as desired, then
press <0>.
For details, see “Customizing a
Picture Style” (p.157).
 Press the <M> button to register
the modified Picture Style. The
Picture Style selection screen will
then reappear.
 The base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
 If the settings in a Picture Style
registered under [User Def. *] have
been modified from the base Picture
Style settings, the Picture Style’s
name will be displayed in blue.
 If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the
base Picture Style in step 4 will clear the parameter settings of the
previously registered User Defined Picture Style.
 If you perform [Clear all camera settings] (p.68), all the [User Def. *]
settings will revert to their defaults. Any Picture Style registered via EOS
Utility (EOS software) will have only its modified parameters reverted to
the default setting.
 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, select the registered [User
Def. *], then shoot.
 Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
161
3 Setting the White BalanceN
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,
the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will
obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be
obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light
source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
In Basic Zone modes, [Q] (Ambience priority) is set automatically. (In
the <P> mode, [Qw] (White priority) is set.)
1
Select [White balance].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
a white balance setting.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
(Approx.)
Display
Q
Qw
Mode
Auto (Ambience priority, p.163)
Auto (White priority, p.163)
Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
3000-7000
W
Daylight
5200
E
Shade
7000
R
Cloudy, twilight, sunset
6000
Y
Tungsten light
3200
U
White fluorescent light
D
Flash use
O
Custom (p.164)
4000
Automatically set*
2000-10000
P
Color temperature (p.166)
2500-10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.
162
3 Setting the White BalanceN
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is
decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and
then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look
white. With this function, pictures with natural color tones can be taken.
Q Setting the Auto White Balance
With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can increase the intensity of the
image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you
select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the
image’s warm color cast.
If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS DIGITAL
camera models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).
1
Select [White balance].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
[Q].
2 Select
 Select [Q], then press the <B>
button.
the desired item.
3 Select
 Select [Auto: Ambience priority] or
[Auto: White priority], then press
<0>.
Q : Auto: Ambience priority
Qw : Auto: White priority
163
3 Setting the White BalanceN
Cautions for Setting [Qw] (White priority)
 The warm color cast of subjects may fade.
 When multiple light sources are included on the screen, the warm color
cast of the picture may not be lessened.
 When using flash, the color tone will be the same as [Q] (Ambience
priority).
O Custom White Balance
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source. Make sure to perform this procedure under
the light source at the actual location of the shoot.
1
Shoot a white object.
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the entire dotted line box (shown in the
illustration) over a plain, white object.
 Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
 You can use any white balance setting.
[Custom White Balance].
2 Select
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
 The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
the white balance data.
3 Import
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<0>.
 On the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
164
3 Setting the White BalanceN
[White balance].
4 Select
 Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
the custom white balance.
5 Select
 Select [ ], then press <0>.
O
 If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
 In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured with
the Picture Style set to [Monochrome], images shot with a Creative filter,
images processed with a Creative filter after shooting, multiple-exposure
images, cropped images, and images shot with another camera.
 Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector
(commercially-available) can produce a more accurate white balance.
 The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (EOS software)
will be registered under [O]. If you perform step 3, the data for the
registered personal white balance will be erased.
165
3 Setting the White BalanceN
P Setting the Color Temperature
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This
function is for advanced users.
1
Select [White balance].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
the color temperature.
2 Set
 Select [P].
 Turn the <6> dial to set the color
temperature, then press <0>.
 The color temperature can be set
from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in
100 K increments.
 When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.
 If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially-available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate
for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the
camera’s color temperature reading.
166
3 White Balance CorrectionN
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have
the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature
conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be
corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users, particularly for those users who
understand the use of color temperature conversion and color
compensating filters and their effects.
White Balance Correction
1
Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
the white balance correction.
2 Set
 Use <9> to move the “ ” mark to the
Sample setting: A2, G1
appropriate position.
 B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The
image’s color balance will be adjusted
toward the color in the direction of the
move.
 On the right of the screen, “Shift”
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
 You can display <z> in the viewfinder when white balance correction is
set (p.425).
 One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating
the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
167
3 White Balance CorrectionN
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current
white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber
bias and magenta/green bias. This function is called white balance
bracketing (WB Bkt.). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3
levels in single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing amount.
B/A bias ±3 levels
 In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <5>
dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will
change to “
” (3 points).
Turning the dial to the right sets the B/
A bracketing, and turning it to the left
sets the M/G bracketing.
 On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction
amount.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting and
return to the menu.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
 During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
be lower.
 Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the image on the card.
 You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
 You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing (p.414).
 “Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
168
3 Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.
1
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.
 Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
 If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
 If HDR mode (p.207), highlight tone priority (p.174), or multiple-exposure
shooting (p.212) is set, the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set
automatically to [Disable].
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and uncheck [X] the [Disabled in
M or B modes] setting, the [Auto Lighting Optimizer] can also be set in
the <a> and <F> modes.
169
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker
parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.
1
Select [High ISO speed NR].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
the level.
2 Set
 Select the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.
 M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction
This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned
and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you
cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction].
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, you can display <z> in the
viewfinder (p.425).
170
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
 If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the
noise reduction effect may become smaller.
 If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are
taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.
 After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card for
noise reduction and merging the images. During the processing of the
images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel,
and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.
 You cannot use AEB and WB bracketing.
 If [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], [z3: Multiple exposure], [z3:
HDR Mode], AEB, or WB bracketing is set, [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] cannot be set.
 You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures or
movie shooting.
 Flash shooting is not possible. The AF-assist beam will be emitted
according to the [8 C.Fn II -6: AF-assist beam firing] setting.
 If you turn off the power, change the shooting mode to a Basic Zone
mode or <F>, or switch to movie shooting, the setting will automatically
switch to [Standard].
171
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.
1
Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
the desired setting.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
 Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
172
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
 With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. You
cannot take another picture until the noise reduction process is
completed.
 Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
 With [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image
displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.
The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
173
3 Highlight Tone PriorityN
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1
Select [Highlight tone priority].
 Under the [z3] tab, select
[Highlight tone priority], then press
<0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Highlight details are improved. The
dynamic range is expanded from the
standard 18% gray to bright
highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes
smoother.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with
highlight tone priority applied.
 When [Enable] is set, noise may increase slightly.
 With [Enable], the settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 or higher.
Expanded ISO speed cannot be set.
If highlight tone priority is set, <A> is displayed in the viewfinder and on
the LCD panel.
174
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and AberrationsN
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject
outlines is called chromatic aberration. And image distortion due to lens
characteristics is called distortion. These lens aberrations and light
falloff can be corrected. By default, Peripheral illumination and
Chromatic aberration correction are set to [Enable], and Distortion
correction is set to [Disable].
If [F Correction data not available] is displayed, see “Lens Correction
Data” on page 177.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
1
Select [Lens aberration
correction].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Peripheral illumin.], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.
 The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction amount
that can be applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.512).
 The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
 In Basic Zone modes, the peripheral illumination correction and
chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically. Distortion
correction will not be applied.
175
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and AberrationsN
Chromatic Aberration Correction
1
Select the setting.
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Chromatic aberration], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
2 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.
Distortion Correction
1
Select the setting.
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Distortion correction], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
2 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
distortion corrected.
176
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and AberrationsN
 When distortion correction is enabled, the camera records an image
range narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (Image
periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution slightly lowered.)
 Distortion correction will be reflected in the captured image, but not in the
viewfinder or Live View image during shooting.
 If you set [Distortion correction] to [Enable], the maximum burst
(p.145) during continuous shooting will decrease.
 Distortion will not be corrected if you shoot a movie or set the HDR
mode, multiple exposures, or Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
 Using distortion correction during Live View shooting will slightly affect
the angle of view.
 AF point display information (p.352) and Dust Delete Data (p.405) will
not be appended to images recorded with distortion correction applied.
Lens Correction Data
The camera already contains data for lens peripheral illumination
correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction for
approx. 30 lenses. If you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination
correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction will
be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data is
registered in the camera.
With EOS Utility (EOS software), you can check which lenses have their
correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to
register the correction data to the camera.
177
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and AberrationsN
Cautions for Lens Correction
 Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and
distortion correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
 When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
 If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction will not be reflected in the image displayed on the
screen.
 The correction amount will be less if the lens used does not have
distance information.
Notes for Lens Correction
 If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after
shooting and check it again.
 Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size
Converter is attached.
 If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable].
178
3 Reducing FlickerN
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source
such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker
and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous
shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors
across the images may result. When you use this feature during
viewfinder shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light
source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker causes less
effect on exposure or color tone.
1
Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Antiflicker shoot.], then press <0>.
2 Select [Enable].
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color tone
caused by the flicker.
 When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the
shutter-release time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous
shooting speed may become slower, and the shooting interval may
become irregular.
 This function does not work with Live View shooting or movie shooting.
 In the <d> or <f> mode, if the shutter speed changes during continuous
shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at different shutter
speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid inconsistent color
tones, use the <s> or <a> mode at a fixed shutter speed.
 The color tone of images shot when [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to
[Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.
 Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.
Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during
continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
179
3 Reducing FlickerN
 If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in
the image, flicker may not be properly detected.
 Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to
reduce the effects of the flicker even when <G> is displayed in the
viewfinder.
 Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
 If you recompose a shot, <G> may appear and disappear
intermittently.
 Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, expected result
may not be obtained even if you use this function.
 Taking test shots in advance is recommended.
 If <G> is not displayed in the viewfinder, under [52: Viewfinder
display], set [Flicker detection] to [Show] (p.74). When the camera
reduces the effects of the flicker when you shoot, <G> will light
up. Under a light source which does not flicker, or if no flicker is detected,
<G> will not be displayed.
 If [Flicker detection] is set to [Show] and [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to
[Disable], metering under a flickering light source will cause <G>
to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting [Enable] before shooting
is recommended.
 In Basic Zone modes, <G> will not be displayed, but the effects of
flicker will be reduced when you shoot.
 Anti-flicker shooting also works with flash. However, the expected result
may not be obtained during wireless flash shooting.
180
3 Setting the Color SpaceN
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically.
1
Select [Color space].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
the desired color space.
2 Set
 Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compliant to Design
rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Post-processing
of the image with computer software will therefore be required.
 If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
 The ICC profile is not appended. For explanations about the ICC profile,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
181
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
Creating a Folder
1
Select [Select folder].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Select
folder], then press <0>.
2 Select [Create folder].
[OK].
3 Select
 A new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.
182
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
Selecting a Folder
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
 Select a folder on the folder selection
screen, then press <0>.
 The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
 Subsequent captured images will be
recorded into the selected folder.
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
As with “100CANON” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.185) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.
The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case
letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be
used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit
folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the last
five characters in each name are different.
183
3 File Numbering Methods
The image files will be numbered from
0001 to 9999 in the order the images are
taken, then saved in a folder. You can
change how the file number is assigned.
1
(Example) IMG_0001.JPG
File number
Select [File numbering].
 Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>.
the file numbering method.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Continuous
Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file
numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you
want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on
multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended
that you use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-2
Card-1
100
0051
0052
Next sequential file number
184
0051
101
0052
3 File Numbering Methods
Auto Reset
Restarts the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts
from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you want to
organize images by cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from
0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card-1
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card-2
Card-1
100
0051
0001
0051
101
0001
File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
Resets the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001
in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is useful, for example, when you want to use different folders for
the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today.
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie
file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG
images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “.MOV” or “.MP4” for movies.
185
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image
as Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright information].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
the option to be set.
2 Select
 Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
text.
3 Enter
 Press the <Q> button to toggle

Text palette




186
between the top and bottom entry
areas.
Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to move the n frame and select
the desired character. Then press
<0> to enter it.
By selecting [E] and pressing
<0>, you can change the input
mode.
You can enter up to 63 characters.
To delete a character, press the <L>
button.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
the setting.
4 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
 The information will be saved and the
screen will return to step 2.
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright
info.] in step 2, you can check the
[Author] and [Copyright] information
that you entered.
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed
entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can
delete the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software, p.512).
187
MEMO
188
5
Advanced Operations
In Creative Zone modes, you
can change various settings of
the camera as you desire to
obtain a wide variety of
shooting results, by selecting
the shutter speed and/or
aperture, adjusting the
exposure as you prefer, etc.
 The O icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
 After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the
exposure settings will remain displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel for approx. 4 sec. (0) by the
metering timer function.
 For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page
460.
Set the <R> switch downward.
189
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the AF point over the subject. Then
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the focus
indicator <o> on the viewfinder’s
bottom right will light up (when in
One-Shot AF mode).
 The shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
the display.
3 Check
 The standard exposure will be
obtained as long as the shutter speed
and aperture display do not blink.
the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
190
d: Program AE
 If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
 If the “8000” shutter speed and the highest f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the
lens.
Differences Between <d> and <A> Modes
In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering
mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. With <d> mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and
other functions (p.460).
Program Shift
 In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and
aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.
 To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the
<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.
 Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer
(0) ends (exposure setting display turns off).
 Program shift cannot be used with flash.
191
s: Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically
sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the
brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster
shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower
shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of
motion.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
1
Frozen motion
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the desired shutter speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> dial.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The aperture is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
 As long as the aperture is not
blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
192
s: Shutter-Priority AE
 If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
 If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the
fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec., “0"5”
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.
193
f: Aperture-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the
shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching
the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher
f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower
f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus.
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
1
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> dial.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The shutter speed is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
 As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, the standard exposure will
be obtained.
194
f: Aperture-Priority AE
 If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster aperture
(lower f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or
set a higher ISO speed.
 If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower aperture (higher
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
lower ISO speed.
Aperture Value Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
f/number displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Depth-of-Field PreviewN
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting, and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
 A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.
 The depth-of-field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as
you change the aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button
(p.256).
 The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview
button is being pressed.
195
a: Manual Exposure
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To
determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the
viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This
method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
2 Set the ISO speed (p.148).
the shutter speed and aperture.
3 Set
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial.
 To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch downward, then turn the
<6> or <5> dial.
Standard exposure index
Exposure level mark
on the subject.
4 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be displayed
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
 Check the exposure level mark <h>
to see how far the current exposure
level is from the standard exposure
level.
the exposure and take the
5 Set
picture.
 Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture.
 If the exposure level exceeds ±3
stops from the standard exposure,
the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
196
a: Manual Exposure
Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto
If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO) for manual exposure shooting, you
can set exposure compensation (p.200) as follows:
• [z2: Expo.comp./AEB]
• Under [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls] with [s: Expo comp
(hold btn, turnS)] (p.438).
• Quick Control (p.56)
 If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter
speed and aperture in order to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore,
you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the
exposure compensation.
 If flash is used when ISO Auto is set, exposure compensation will not be
applied even if an exposure compensation amount is set.
 Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark [X] for
[Disabled in M or B modes] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be
set even in the <a> mode (p.169).
 When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared with
when the <A> button was pressed.
 If exposure compensation (p.200) was applied in <d>, <s>, or <f>
mode, and then the shooting mode is switched to <a> with ISO Auto
set, the exposure compensation amount already set will still be
maintained.
 With ISO Auto set and [8C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments] set to
[1: 1/2-stop], 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be applied with the
ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed
displayed will not change.
197
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically. (In the
<8: x> and <v: X> modes, center-weighted average metering is
set.)
1 Press the <D> button (9).
the metering mode.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
q:Evaluative metering
w:Partial metering
r:Spot metering
e:Center-weighted average
metering
q Evaluative metering
General-purpose metering mode suited even
for backlit subjects. The camera adjusts the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.
w Partial metering
Effective where there are much brighter lights
around the subject due to backlight, etc. Partial
metering covers approx. 6.0% of the viewfinder
area at the center.
r Spot metering
Effective when metering a specific part of the
subject or scene. Spot metering covers approx.
3.8% of the viewfinder area at the center.
198
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
e Center-weighted average metering
The metering is averaged for the entire scene
with the viewfinder center weighted more
heavily.
With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when you
press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. In the w (Partial
metering), r (Spot metering), and e (Center-weighted average metering)
modes, the exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the
shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.)
199
O Setting Exposure CompensationN
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the <d>, <s>, and <f> shooting
modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops* in
1/3-stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If you want to set
the exposure compensation setting beyond ±3 stops, use the Quick Control
(p.56) or follow the instructions for [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] on the next page.
If the <a> mode and the ISO Auto are both set, see page 197 to set the
exposure compensation.
* During Live View shooting, exposure compensation can be set up to ±3 stops.
1
Increased exposure
for a brighter image
Decreased exposure
for a darker image
Check the exposure.
 Press the shutter button halfway
(0) and check the exposure level
indicator.
the exposure compensation amount.
2 Set
 While looking in the viewfinder or at
the LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch downward, then turn the <5>
dial.
 If you set exposure compensation,
<O> will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
the picture.
3 Take
 To cancel the exposure compensation, set
the exposure compensation amount back
to <E>.
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.169) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
 The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
 After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can prevent the
exposure compensation amount from changing accidentally by setting
the <R> switch upward.
 If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the
exposure level indicator will display <I> or <J>.
200
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three
successive shots. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1
Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
 Under the [z2] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB], then press
<0>.
the AEB range.
2 Set
 Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB
AEB range
range. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to
set the exposure compensation
amount.
 Press <0> to set it.
 When you exit the menu, the AEB
range will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
the picture.
3 Take
 Three bracketed shots will be taken
according to the drive mode set in this
sequence: Standard exposure,
decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
 AEB will not be automatically
canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step
2 to turn off the AEB range display.
201
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
 During AEB, <A> in the viewfinder and AEB range will blink.
 If the drive mode is set to <u> or <B>, press the shutter button three
times for each shot. When <o>, <i>, or <M> is set and you hold
down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be
taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop shooting.
When <Q> or <k> is set, the three bracketed shots will be taken
continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
 You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
 If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
 AEB cannot be used with flash, bulb exposures, or when [Multi Shot
Noise Reduction], [HDR Mode], or a Creative filter is set.
 AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to
<2> or when the flash is ready to fire.
202
A AE LockN
You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from
the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at
the same exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure,
then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is
effective for shooting backlit subjects, etc.
1
Focus on the subject.
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be displayed.
the <A> button (0).
2 Press
 The <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
 Each time you press the <A> button,
the current exposure setting is locked.
and take the picture.
3 Recompose
 If you want to take more pictures
while maintaining the AE lock, keep
holding down the <A> button and
press the shutter button to take
another picture.
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
(p.198)
q*
wre
AF Point Selection (p.120-122)
Automatic Selection
AE lock is applied at the AF
point that achieved focus.
Manual Selection
AE lock is applied at the
selected AF point.
AE lock is applied to the center AF point.
* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied to the
center AF point.
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
203
F: Bulb Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter
button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night
scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long
exposures.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <F>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel, turn
the <6> or <5> dial.
the picture.
3 Take
 The exposure will continue for as long
Elapsed exposure time
as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
 The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 Long exposures produce more noise than usual.
 If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.150).
 For a bulb exposure, if you use both the self-timer and mirror lockup
instead of the bulb timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely
(self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter
button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release
sound, but no picture will be taken. If you use the bulb timer under the
same shooting conditions, you need not keep holding down the shutter
button completely.
204
F: Bulb Exposures
 With [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise
generated during long exposures (p.172).
 For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended.
Using mirror lockup (p.219) with bulb exposures is also possible.
 You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-60E3
(sold separately, p.221).
 You can also use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.221) for
bulb exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button,
the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
p Bulb TimerN
You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. With the bulb timer,
you need not keep holding down the shutter button during the bulb
exposure. This reduces camera vibration blur.
The bulb timer can be set only in the <F> (Bulb) shooting mode. It
cannot be set (or will not function) in any other shooting mode.
1
Select [Bulb timer].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Bulb
timer], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press the
<B> button.
205
F: Bulb Exposures
the desired exposure time.
3 Set
 Select the hour, minute, or second.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
[OK].
4 Select
 The set time will be displayed on the
menu screen.
 When you exit the menu, <p>
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
Bulb timer
the picture.
5 Take
 Press the shutter button completely,
and the bulb exposure will start and
continue until the set time elapses.
 To cancel the timer setting, set
[Disable] in step 2.
Elapsed exposure time
 If you press the shutter button completely and then let go while the bulb
timer is operating, the bulb exposure will stop.
 Doing any of the following will cancel the bulb timer (reverts to
[Disable]): Set the power switch to <2>, switch to movie shooting, or
change to a shooting mode other than <F>.
206
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced for a high dynamic
range of tones even with high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is
effective for landscape and still-life shots.
With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard
exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured
continuously for each shot and then merged together
automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
1
Select [HDR Mode].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [HDR
Mode], then press <0>.
 The HDR mode screen will appear.
[Adjust dyn range].
2 Set
 Select the desired dynamic range
setting, then press <0>.
 Selecting [Auto] will have the
dynamic range set automatically
depending on the image’s overall
tonal range.
 The higher the number, the wider the
dynamic range will be.
 To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable
HDR].
[Effect].
3 Set
 Select the desired effect, then press
<0>.
207
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Effects
 Natural
For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and
shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and
shadows will be reduced.
 Art standard
While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than
with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to
have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have
bright (or dark) edges.
 Art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [Art standard], and the low
contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.
 Art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and
the picture look like an oil painting.
 Art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are
decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and
old. The subject outlines will have bolder bright (or dark) edges.
Art standard
Art vivid
Art bold
Saturation
Standard
High
Higher
Low
Bold outline
Standard
Weak
Strong
Stronger
Brightness
Standard
Standard
Standard
Dark
Flat
Flat
Flat
Flatter
Tone
Art embossed
Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style
currently set (p.154).
208
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
[Continuous HDR].
4 Set
 Select either [1 shot only] or [Every
shot], then press <0>.
 With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will
be canceled automatically after the
shooting ends.
 With [Every shot], HDR shooting
continues until the setting in step 3 is
set to [Disable HDR].
[Auto Image Align].
5 Set
 For handheld shooting, select
[Enable]. When using a tripod, select
[Disable], then press <0>.
the picture.
6 Take
 HDR shooting is possible with
viewfinder shooting and Live View
shooting.
 When you press the shutter button
completely, three consecutive images
will be captured, and the HDR image
will be recorded to the card.
209
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
 You cannot select RAW or RAW+JPEG. The HDR mode cannot be set if
RAW or RAW+JPEG is set.
 The HDR mode cannot be set when AEB, WB bracketing, Multi Shot
Noise Reduction, or multiple exposures are set, or during bulb exposures
and movie shooting.
 HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion (H). HDR shooting is
possible within ISO 100 - ISO 16000.
 The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
 During HDR shooting, the settings of [Distortion correction], [z2:
Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3: Highlight tone priority] will be
automatically switched to [Disable].
 If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
 In HDR shooting, 3 images are captured with different shutter speeds set
automatically. Therefore, even in <s> and <a> shooting modes, the
shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you set.
 To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.
 You can display <z> in the viewfinder when HDR mode is set (p.425).
During Live View Shooting
 Magnified view is not possible.
 The Live View image displayed with the effect applied will not look
exactly the same as the actual image.
210
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
 When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.352) and Dust Delete Data (p.405) will
not be appended to the image.
 If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to
[Enable], image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be
slightly lowered. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to
camera shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that
when shooting with excessively bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto
image alignment may not work properly.
 If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to
[Disable], the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR effect
may be minimal. Using a tripod is recommended.
 Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular exposure, irregular colors, or noise may appear.
 HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural
color reproduction of the illuminated areas.
 With HDR shooting, it takes some time to record images to the card
since they are merged after shooting. During the processing of the
images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel,
and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.
 If you change the shooting mode or switch to movie shooting after setting
HDR shooting, HDR shooting setting may be cleared ([Adjust dyn
range] setting may be switched to [Disable HDR]).
211
P Multiple ExposuresN
You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. With
Live View shooting (p.255), you can see in real time how the exposures
are merged when you shoot multiple-exposure images.
1
Select [Multiple exposure].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Multiple
exposure], then press <0>.
[Multiple exposure].
2 Set
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 To exit shooting multiple exposures,
select [Disable].
[Multi-expos ctrl].
3 Set
 Select the desired multiple-exposure
control method, then press <0>.
 Additive
The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively.
Based on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure
compensation. Refer to the basic guide below to set the exposure
compensation amount.
Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures
Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:
-2 stops
The noise, irregular colors, banding, etc. of the image displayed during
shooting with [Additive] set may be different from the final multipleexposure image recorded.
212
P Multiple ExposuresN
 Average
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation
is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot
multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s
background will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard
exposure.
the [No. of exposures].
4 Set
 Set the number of exposures, then
press <0>.
 You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.
[Continue Mult-exp].
5 Set
 Select either [1 shot only] or
[Continuously], then press <0>.
 With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure
shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
 With [Continuously], multipleexposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 2 is set to [Disable].
the first exposure.
6 Take
 The captured image will be displayed.
Remaining number of
exposures
 The <P> icon will blink.
 You can check the remaining
exposures in the brackets [ ] in the
viewfinder or on the screen.
 Pressing the <x> button enables
you to view the captured image
(p.217).
213
P Multiple ExposuresN
subsequent exposures.
7 Shoot
 The merged multiple-exposure image
will be displayed.
 With Live View shooting, the multipleexposure images merged so far will
be displayed. By pressing the
<B> button, you can display only
the Live View image.
 Multiple-exposure shooting will end
when the set number of exposures
are taken. With continuous shooting,
if you keep holding down the shutter
button, the shooting continues until
the set numbers of exposures are
taken.
214
P Multiple ExposuresN
 During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will
decrease greatly.
 Only the merged multiple-exposure image will be saved. The images
taken in steps 6 and 7 for the multiple-exposure image will not be saved.
 The image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed
noise reduction and color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will
also be set for the subsequent exposures.
 You cannot set an aspect ratio for multiple-exposure shooting. Images
will be taken with a 3:2 aspect ratio.
 If WB bracketing, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, HDR mode, or a Creative
filter is set, multiple-exposure shooting cannot be set.
 During multiple-exposure shooting, the settings of [z1: Lens
aberration correction], [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3:
Highlight tone priority] will be automatically switched to [Disable].
 If [z3: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for
shooting.
 With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more
noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be. Also, as noise
increases with higher ISO speeds, shooting at low ISO speeds is
recommended.
 If [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple
exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up longer.)
 If you perform Live View shooting with [Additive] set, the Live View
function will stop automatically when the multiple-exposure shooting
ends.
 In step 7, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image
displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final
multiple-exposure image recorded.
 Multiple-exposure shooting will be canceled if the power switch is set to
<2> or if you switch to movie shooting.
 If you switch the shooting mode to a Basic Zone mode, <w>, or <x>
during shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.
 If you connect the camera to a computer, multiple-exposure shooting will
not be possible. If you connect the camera to a computer during
shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.
You can press the <x> button to view the multiple exposures taken so far
or delete the last single exposure (p.217).
215
P Multiple ExposuresN
Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card
You can select a 1 image recorded on the card as the first single
exposure. The image data of the selected 1 image will remain intact.
You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or
JPEG images.
1
Select [Select image for multi. expo.].
 The images on the card will be
displayed.
the first image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be used as the first single
exposure, then press <0>.
 Select [OK].
 The file number of the selected image
will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
the picture.
3 Take
 When you select the first image, the number of remaining
exposures as set with [No. of exposures] will decrease by 1.
For example, if [No. of exposures] is 3, you can shoot two
exposures.
 Images shot with [z3: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] and
images whose [z4: Aspect ratio] is set to any setting other than [3:2]
(p.146) cannot be selected as the first single exposure.
 [Disable] will be applied for [z1: Lens aberration correction] and
[z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] regardless of the settings of the 1
image selected as the first single exposure.
 The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color
space, etc. set for the first 1 image will also be applied for the
subsequent images.
 If [z3: Picture Style] is [Auto] for the RAW image selected as the first
1 image, [Standard] will be applied for shooting.
 You cannot select an image taken with another camera.
 You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single exposure.
 If you select [Deselect img], the selected image will be canceled.
216
P Multiple ExposuresN
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
Before you finish shooting the set
number of exposures, you can press the
<x> button to check the current
exposure level, overlap alignment, and
overall effect of the merged multipleexposure image.
If you press the <L> button, the
operations possible during multipleexposure shooting will be displayed.
Operation
Description
q Undo last image
Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another image).
The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1.
W Save and exit
The images shot so far will be merged and saved as a
multiple-exposure image.
r Exit without saving
Multiple-exposure shooting will exit without saving the
images shot.
2 Return to previous The screen before you pressed the <L> button will
screen
reappear.
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-exposure
images.
217
P Multiple ExposuresN
FAQ
 Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?
All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41
or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure image will be a 1
image.
Image-Recording Quality Setting
JPEG
Merged Multiple-Exposure Image
JPEG
1
1
41/61
1
1+JPEG
1+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
1+JPEG
 Can I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single
exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.216). Note that
you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
 Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?
You can shoot multiple exposures with Live View shooting (p.255).
 Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure
shooting?
As long as [52: Auto power off] is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the timing for auto power off to automatically take effect
will all become after approx. 30 min. of idle time. If the auto power off
takes effect, multiple-exposure shooting will end, and multipleexposure settings will be canceled.
Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off
will take effect at the time set with the camera, and multipleexposure settings will be canceled.
218
2 Mirror LockupN
Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action when the picture
is taken is called “mirror shock”. Mirror lockup keeps the mirror up
before and during exposure to reduce blur caused by camera
vibrations. Useful when shooting close-ups (macro photography), using
a super telephoto lens, and shooting at slow shutter speeds.
1
Set [Mirror lockup] to [Enable].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Mirror
lockup], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
on the subject, then press
2 Focus
the shutter button completely.
 The mirror will swing up.
the shutter button
3 Press
completely again.
 The picture is taken and the mirror
goes back down.
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an
intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the
camera’s internal components.
 In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day, take
the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.
 If you use the self-timer and bulb exposure in combination with a mirror
lockup, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer delay time +
bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the self-timer
countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no picture will be taken.
 During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu operations, etc. are
disabled.
219
Using the Eyepiece Cover
 Even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting, only one shot can
be taken.
 You can also use the self-timer with mirror lockup.
 If approx. 30 sec. elapse after the mirror is locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the
mirror again.
 When shooting with mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch
RS-60E3 (sold separately, p.221) is recommended.
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.221) with mirror
lockup. Setting the remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is recommended.
Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you take a picture without looking through the viewfinder, such as
when you use the self-timer, bulb exposure, or a remote switch, stray
light entering the viewfinder can cause the picture to look dark. To
prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.33) attached to the camera
strap.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece
cover is unnecessary.
the eyecup.
1 Detach
 Push the bottom of the eyecup to
detach it.
the eyepiece cover.
2 Attach
 Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
 After you finish shooting, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup.
220
F Using a Remote Switch
You can connect Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) to the
camera and shoot (p.468).
For detailed instructions, refer to the remote switch’s instruction
manual.
1 Open the terminal cover.
the plug to the remote
2 Connect
control terminal.
R Remote Control Shooting
With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately), you
can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet
away from the camera. You can either shoot
immediately or with a 2-sec. delay.
You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5
(sold separately).
1 Focus on the subject.
the lens’s focus mode switch
2 Set
to <MF>.
 You can also shoot with <f>.
3 Press the <R> button (9).
221
R Remote Control Shooting
the self-timer.
4 Select
 Look at the LCD panel and turn the
<6> dial to select <Q> or <k>.
the remote controller’s
5 Press
transmit button.
Remote
control
sensor
 Point the remote controller toward the
camera’s remote control sensor, and
press the transmit button.
 The self-timer lamp lights up and the
picture is taken.
 Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by
triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from
such light sources.
 If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and
operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently.
 If flash light is emitted from a flash on another camera around this
camera, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently. Do not expose the remote control sensor to flash light from
a flash on another camera.
Remote control shooting is also possible with an EX-series Speedlite
equipped with a remote-release function.
222
p Interval Timer Shooting
With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number
of shots. The camera will take a series of single shots at the set interval
until the set number of shots are taken.
1
Select [Interval timer].
 Under the [z4] tab (the [z2] tab in
Basic Zone modes), select [Interval
timer], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press the
<B> button.
the shooting interval and
3 Set
number of shots.
 Select the number to be set (hours:
minutes: seconds / number of shots).
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
 Interval
Settable from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
 No. of shots
Settable from [01] to [99]. If you set [00], the camera will keep
shooting until you stop the interval timer.
223
p Interval Timer Shooting
Interval
No. of shots
[OK].
4 Select
 The interval timer settings will be
displayed on the menu screen.
 When you exit the menu, <p>
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
Interval timer
the picture.
5 Take
 After taking the first shot, subsequent
shots will be taken according to the
interval timer settings.
 During interval timer shooting,
<p> will blink.
 After the set number of shots are
taken, the interval timer shooting will
stop and be automatically canceled.
 Using a tripod is recommended.
 Taking test shots is recommended.
 After the interval timer shooting starts, you can still press the shutter
button completely to take a picture as usual. However, from 5 sec. before
the next interval timer shooting, the shooting function settings, menu
operation, image playback, and other operations will be suspended and
the camera will return to shooting-ready state.
 If a picture is being taken or an image is being processed when the next
shot is scheduled on the interval timer, the shot set for that time will be
skipped. The camera will thereby shoot fewer shots than the number set
for interval timer shooting.
 Auto power off operates with the interval timer. The power will
automatically turn on approx. 1 min. before the next shot.
 Interval timer shooting can be combined with AEB, WB bracketing,
multiple exposures, and HDR mode.
 You can stop the interval timer shooting by selecting [Disable] or turning
the power switch to <2>.
224
p Interval Timer Shooting
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, the camera will not shoot
when focus is not achieved. Setting it to <MF> and focusing manually is
recommended.
 Live View shooting, movie shooting, or bulb exposures cannot be
performed with interval timer.
 If the shooting time is long, using DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately)
and AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) is recommended.
 If a shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is set, such as a long
exposure, the camera cannot shoot with the set interval. The camera will
thereby shoot fewer shots than the number set for interval timer
shooting. Also, the number of shots may decrease when the shutter
speed and the shooting interval are nearly the same.
 If the image recording time on the card is longer than the set shooting
interval due to card performance or shooting settings, etc., the camera
may not shoot with the set shooting interval.
 If you use flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than
the flash’s recycling time. If the interval is too short, the flash may not
fire.
 If the shooting interval is too short, the camera may not take a picture or
may capture an image without autofocusing.
 Interval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you do
any of the following: Set the power switch to <2>, display the Live
View or movie shooting screen, set the shooting mode to <F> or <w/
x>, or use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.512).
 After interval timer shooting starts, you cannot use remote control
shooting (p.221) or remote-release shooting with an EOS-dedicated,
external Speedlite.
 If your eye will not remain on the viewfinder eyepiece during interval
timer shooting, attach the eyepiece cover (p.220). If stray light enters the
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
225
MEMO
226
6
Flash Photography
This chapter explains how to shoot with built-in flash
and external Speedlites (EX-series, sold separately),
how to set flash settings on the camera’s menu screen,
and how to use the built-in flash for wireless flash
shooting.
 Flash cannot be used with movie shooting. It will not fire.
 AEB cannot be used with flash.
227
D Using the Built-in Flash
In Creative Zone modes, just press the
<D> button to raise the built-in flash for
flash photography.
Before shooting, check that [D] is
displayed in the viewfinder. After shooting,
push the built-in flash back down with your
fingers until it clicks into place.
In Basic Zone modes, depending on the shooting mode, you can set the
built-in flash with Quick Control (p.107).
The table below shows the shutter speed and aperture settings that will
be used with flash.
Shooting Mode
d
Shutter Speed
Aperture
Automatically set (1/250 sec. - 1/60 sec.)
Automatically set
Automatically set
s
Manually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.)
f
Automatically set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.)
Manually set
a
Manually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.)
Manually set
F
Exposure continues while you hold down
the shutter button or while the bulb timer is
operating.
Manually set
Flash Photography in the <f> Mode
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set automatically
(autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture. The shutter speed
will be set automatically between 1/250 sec. - 30 sec. to suit the scene’s
brightness.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with the auto flash metering, and
the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically. Both
the subject and background look properly exposed with a touch of
atmosphere (automatic slow-speed flash sync). If you are handholding the
camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is
recommended.
To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash
sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)]
(p.236).
228
D Using the Built-in Flash
Effective Range of Built-in Flash
(Approx. in meters / feet)
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
ISO Speed
(p.148)
ISO 100
Wide Angle
Telephoto
f/3.5
f/5.6
1 - 3.4 / 3.3 - 11.2
1 - 2.1 / 3.3 - 6.9
ISO 400
1 - 6.9 / 3.3 - 22.6
1 - 4.3 / 3.3 - 14.1
ISO 1600
1.7 - 13.7 / 5.6 - 44.9
1.1 - 8.6 / 3.6 - 28.2
ISO 6400
3.4 - 27.4 / 11.2 - 89.9
2.1 - 17.1 / 6.9 - 56.1
* When a high ISO speed is set and focusing distance is long, appropriate
exposure may not be obtained depending on the subject conditions, etc.
 Detach any lens hood when shooting with the built-in flash.
 If a lens hood is attached or if the subject is too close, the built-in flash
will be obstructed and the bottom of the captured image may look dark.
 Do not perform flash photography when the built-in flash is held down
with your finger or not fully raised for some other reason.
If you use a super telephoto lens or large-aperture lens and the bottom of
the picture looks dark, using an external Speedlite (sold separately, p.233) is
recommended.
229
D Using the Built-in Flash
3 Red-eye Reduction
Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can
reduce red eye.
1
Select [Red-eye reduc.].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Red-eye
reduc.], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 For flash photography, when you
press the shutter button halfway, the
red-eye reduction lamp will be
emitted.
 The red-eye reduction feature is more effective when the subject looks at
the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you are
close to the subject.
 When you press the shutter button halfway, the scale
display on the bottom of the viewfinder will shrink and
turn off. For best results, take the picture after this
scale display turns off.
 The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the
individual subject.
y Flash Exposure CompensationN
Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject
does not come out as desired. You can set the flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
1
230
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
D Using the Built-in Flash
[y].
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select [y*], then press
<0>.
 The flash exposure compensation
setting screen will appear.
the flash exposure
3 Set
compensation amount.
 To make the flash exposure brighter,
turn the <5> or <6> dial to the
right (increased exposure).
To make it darker, turn the <5> or
<6> dial to the left (decreased
exposure).
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the <y> icon will appear in
the viewfinder.
 After taking the picture, follow steps 1
to 3 and set the flash exposure
compensation amount to 0.
 If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.169) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased flash
exposure compensation is set.
 If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite (sold
separately, p.233), you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with
the camera. If it is set with both the camera and external Speedlite, the
Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.
 The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
 You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash
settings] in [z1: Flash control] (p.235).
 The camera can also be used to set the external Speedlite’s flash
exposure compensation in the same way as with the built-in flash.
231
D Using the Built-in Flash
A FE LockN
FE (flash exposure) lock obtains and locks the appropriate flash
exposure for the desired part of the image.
1
Press the <D> button.
 The built-in flash will be raised.
 Press the shutter button halfway and
look in the viewfinder to check that
the <D> icon is lit.
2 Focus on the subject.
the <A> button (8).
3 Press
 Aim the viewfinder center over the
subject where you want to lock the flash
exposure, then press the <A> button.
 The flash will fire a preflash and the
required flash output is calculated
and retained in memory.
 In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed
for a moment and <d> will light up.
 Each time you press the <A> button,
a preflash is fired and the required
flash output is calculated and retained
in memory.
the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
 The flash is fired, and the picture is
taken.
 If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash,
the <D> icon will blink. Move closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.
 FE lock is not possible during Live View shooting.
232
D Using an External Speedlite
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
Using an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash
photography easy.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera’s
menu, see pages 235-243.
Shoe-mount Speedlites
Macro Lites
 Flash exposure compensation
Set it with Quick Control (p.56) or [External flash func. setting]
under [z1: Flash control] (p.240). With Quick Control, you can set
flash exposure compensation in the same way as for the built-in
flash. See page 230.
 FE lock
Set this in the same way as for the built-in flash. See steps 2 to 4 on
page 232.
If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary.
233
D Using an External Speedlite
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
 With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
 When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at
1/250 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, be sure to
test the flash synchronization before shooting with the sync speed set
within approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec. The flash duration of such units is
longer than that of compact flash units and varies depending on the
model.
Cautions for Live View Shooting
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z6:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.272). The flash will not fire if it is set to
[Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
 If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
 Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not fire.
234
3 Setting the FlashN
With the built-in flash or an EX-series, external Speedlite compatible
with flash function settings, you can use the camera’s menu screen to
set flash functions and the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions. If
you use an external Speedlite, attach the Speedlite to the camera
and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.
For details on the external Speedlite’s flash functions, refer to the
Speedlite’s instruction manual.
1
Select [Flash control].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
 The Flash control screen will appear.
the desired item.
2 Select
 Select the menu option to be set, then
press <0>.
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set
[Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist
beam to be emitted, set [Disable].
E-TTL II Metering
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the
flash exposure will be averaged for the
entire metered scene. Depending on the
scene, flash exposure compensation
may be necessary. This setting is for
advanced users.
235
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Synchronization Speed in Av Mode
You can set the flash-sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE <f> mode.
 4: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/250
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.
 6: 1/250-1/60 sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.
 7: 1/250 sec. (fixed)
The flash-sync speed is fixed at 1/250 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/250-1/60sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/250-1/60sec. auto].
If [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is not
possible in the <f> mode with the external Speedlite.
236
3 Setting the FlashN
Displaying the Flash Function Setting Screen Directly
When you use the built-in flash or an
external, EX-series Speedlite compatible
with flash function settings, you can
press the <D> button to directly display
the [Built-in flash settings] or [External
flash func. setting] screen without first
displaying the menu screen.
 With built-in flash
Press the <D> button twice.
 Press the button to raise the built-in
flash.
 Press the button again to display the
[Built-in flash settings] screen.
 If [Flash firing] is set to [Disable], the
[z1: Flash control] screen will
appear (p.235).
 With external Speedlite
Press the <D> button.
 With the external Speedlite turned on,
press the <D> button to display the
[External flash func. setting]
screen.
When you press the <D> button to display the flash function setting screen,
you cannot set [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], [Flash sync. speed in Av
mode], or [External flash C.Fn setting]. Set these functions with [z1:
Flash control] instead.
237
3 Setting the FlashN
Built-in Flash Settings
 Flash mode
Normally, set this to [E-TTL II]. This
enables autoexposure shooting with the
built-in flash.
To set the flash output level manually,
select [Manual flash].
Select [2flash output], then set the
flash output level to within 1/1 - 1/128
(1/3-stop increments) before shooting.
 Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that
the flash fires immediately after the
exposure starts.
If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter closes.
When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail
of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel.
When second-curtain synchronization is set together with [E-TTL II], the
flash will be fired twice in a row: once when you press the shutter button
completely and once right before the end of the exposure.
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [2nd curtain] is set.
238
3 Setting the FlashN
 2 Flash exposure compensation
The same setting as step 3 in “Flash
Exposure Compensation” on page 230
can be set.
 Wireless functions
With wireless flash photography (via
optical transmission), you can use the
built-in flash to wirelessly control external
Speedlites.
For details, see “Wireless Flash
Photography” on page 244.
239
3 Setting the FlashN
External Flash Function Settings
The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the
external Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom
Function settings, etc.
For the functions compatible with your Speedlite (sold separately), refer
to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Sample display
Wireless functions/
Flash ratio control
Flash mode
Shutter
synchronization
Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
Flash exposure
bracketing
Flash exposure
compensation
 Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II] is the standard mode of
EX-series Speedlites for automatic flash
shooting.
[Manual flash] is for setting the
Speedlite’s [Flash output level]
yourself.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the
instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the functions.
240
3 Setting the FlashN
 Wireless functions / Flash ratio control
Wireless (multiple) flash shooting is
possible with radio or optical
transmission.
For details on wireless flash, refer to the
instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with wireless flash shooting.
With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.)
compatible with flash function settings,
you can set the flash ratio between flash
tubes or flash heads A and B, or perform
wireless flash with additional slave units.
For details on flash ratio control, refer to
the macro flash’s instruction manual.
 Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash
head, you can set the flash coverage.
Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the
camera will automatically set the flash
coverage to match the lens focal length.
 Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain
synchronization] so that the flash fires
immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will fire right before
the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you
can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a more
natural feel. When second-curtain synchronization is set together with [ETTL II], the flash will be fired twice in a row: once when you press the
shutter button completely and once right before the end of the exposure.
If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at all
shutter speeds. This is useful when you want to shoot with background
blur (open aperture) in locations such as outdoors in daylight.
241
3 Setting the FlashN
 Flash exposure compensation
The same setting as step 3 in “Flash
Exposure Compensation” on page 230
can be set.
For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
 Flash exposure bracketing
While the flash output is changed
automatically, three shots are taken.
For details, refer to the instruction
manual of a Speedlite compatible with
flash exposure bracketing.
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
 With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings,
you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and
[Flash exposure compensation] under [External flash func. setting].
([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series
Speedlites.)
 If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite, you
cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the camera (Quick
Control or External flash function settings). If it is set with both the
camera and external Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the
camera’s.
242
3 Setting the FlashN
External Speedlite Custom Function Settings
For details on the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the
Speedlite’s instruction manual.
1
Select [External flash C.Fn
setting].
the desired function.
2 Set
 Select the number, then press <0>.
 Select the setting, then press <0>.
With an EX-series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always fire at full output if the
[Flash metering mode] in Flash Custom Function is set to [TTL] (autoflash).
Clear Settings
1 Select [Clear settings].
the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
 Select [Clear built-in flash set.],
[Clear external flash set.], or [Clear
ext. flash C.Fn set.], then press
<0>.
 When you select [OK], the respective
flash settings or all the Custom
Function settings will be cleared.
The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled on the
camera’s [Flash control] screen. Set it with the Speedlite.
243
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit for Canon EXseries, external Speedlites having a wireless slave feature. It can
wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire via optical transmission.
Be sure to read the instructions and cautions about wireless flash
photography (optical transmission) in the Speedlite’s instruction
manual.
Slave Unit Settings and Position
Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and
set it as follows. The settings other than the ones below for the slave
unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different types of Speedlite
slave units can be used and controlled together.
(1) Set the external Speedlite as a slave unit.
(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same channel
as set on the camera.*1
(3) For flash ratio control, set the slave unit’s firing group.
(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown
below.
(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.*2
Example of Wireless Flash Set-up
Approx. 10 m/32.8 ft.
Indoors
Outdoors
Approx. 7 m/23.0 ft.
Approx. 80°
Approx. 5 m/
16.4 ft.
244
Approx. 7 m/
23.0 ft.
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
*1: If the slave Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function,
the flash can work regardless of the camera’s channel setting.
*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not
face the camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and
be received by the slave unit. When using an EX-series Speedlite with fixed
light-emitting unit (flash head) and wireless sensor, take pictures while making
sure it can fire.
 Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off
To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s <A>
button. If you are using manual flash firing, press the slave unit’s test
firing button to cancel the auto power off.
The camera’s master function cannot be used for wireless flash photography
with radio transmission.
245
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Wireless Flash Photography Configurations
The tables below show the possible configurations for wireless flash
shooting. Select the configuration suiting the subject, shooting
conditions, the number of external Speedlites you use, etc.
External Speedlite
Fully
Automatic
(E-TTL II
autoflash)
Setting
Built-in
Flash
Quantity
A:B
Flash
Ratio
Single
-
-
Single
-
Used
Multiple
-
-
p.250
p.251
Multiple
Set
-
Multiple
-
Used
Multiple
Set
Used
• Flash exposure compensation
• FE lock
Page
Wireless
Functions
Firing
Group
p.247
0
1 All
p.249
0:3
-
0
1 All
0
1(A:B)
p.252
0+3 1 All and 2
0+3
p.253
External Speedlite
Manual
Flash
1(A:B)2
Setting
Quantity
A:B
Flash
Ratio
Built-in
Flash
Single/
Multiple
-
-
Multiple
Set
-
Page
p.254
Wireless
Functions
Firing
Group
0
1 All
0
1(A:B)
Single/
Multiple
-
Used
0+3 1 All and 2
Multiple
Set
Used
0+3 1(A:B)2
Even if you disable the built-in flash from firing, it will still fire in order
to control the slave unit via optical transmission. The flash fired to
control the slave unit may therefore appear in the picture depending on the
shooting conditions.
246
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite
This shows the most basic setup for
fully-automatic wireless flash shooting
with one external Speedlite.
Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all
wireless flash shooting. Therefore,
these steps are omitted in other
wireless flash setups explained on
the pages hereafter.
On the menu screens, the <0> and
<1> icons indicate the external
Speedlite, and the <3> and <2>
icons indicate the built-in flash.
1
Press the <I> button to raise the
built-in flash.
 For wireless flash shooting, be sure
to raise the built-in flash.
[Flash control].
2 Select
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash
control].
3 Select [Built-in flash settings].
247
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
4 Set [Flash mode: E-TTL II].
5 Set [Wireless func.] to [0].
[Channel].
6 Set
 Set the transmission channel (1-4) to
the same one as the slave unit.
7 Set [Firing group] to [1All].
the picture.
8 Take
 Set the camera and take the picture
in the same way as with normal flash
shooting.
 To terminate wireless flash shooting,
set [Wireless func.] to [Disable].
 Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.
 Firing a test flash is not possible with the slave unit.
248
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and Built-in Flash
This is fully automatic wireless flash
shooting with one external Speedlite and
the built-in flash.
You can change the flash ratio between
the external Speedlite and built-in flash
to adjust how the shadows cast on the
subject.
1
Set [Wireless func.] to [0:3].
 In step 5 on page 248, set [Wireless
func.] to [0:3].
the desired flash ratio and
2 Set
take the picture.
 Select [1:2] and set the flash ratio
within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio
to the right of 1:1 is not possible.
 If the built-in flash output is not enough, set a higher ISO speed (p.148).
 The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop
increments).
249
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
Multiple Speedlite slave units can be fired as one flash unit or separated
into slave groups for shooting with flash ratio control.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple
Speedlites.
Basic settings:
Flash mode
: E-TTL II
Wireless func. :0
Channel
: (Same as slave units)
 [1All] Firing multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit
Effective when you need a large flash
output. All the slave units will fire at the
same output and be controlled to obtain
a standard exposure.
No matter which firing group (A, B, or C)
the slave units belong to, they will all fire
as one group.
1 Set [Firing group] to [1All].
2 Take the picture.
250
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
 [1 (A:B)] Firing multiple slave units in multiple groups
You can divide the slave units into
groups A and B, and change the flash
ratio to obtain the desired lighting effect.
Refer to the Speedlite’s instruction
manual and set one slave unit to firing
group A and the other to firing group B.
Position the Speedlites as shown in the
A
B
illustration.
1 Set [Firing group] to [1(A:B)].
the A:B flash ratio and shoot.
2 Set
 Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the
flash ratio.
If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], group C will not fire.
The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2stop increments) for the exposure level.
251
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and Multiple External Speedlites
The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained
on pages 250-251.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple
Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.
1
Basic settings:
Flash mode
: E-TTL II
Wireless func. : 0+3
Channel
: (Same as slave units)
[Firing group].
2 Set
 Select [1All and 2] or
[1(A:B)2].
 With [1(A:B)2], set the A:B flash
ratio and shoot.
A
[1 All and 2]
252
B
[1 (A:B) 2]
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Creative Wireless Flash Shooting
 Flash exposure compensation
When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure compensation
can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below) that
can be set vary depending on the [Wireless func.] and [Firing group]
settings.
Flash exposure compensation
 The set amount of flash exposure
compensation will be applied to the
built-in flash and all the external
Speedlites.
2 exp. comp.
 Flash exposure compensation is
applied only to the built-in flash.
1 exp. comp.
 The set amount of flash exposure
compensation will be applied to all
the external Speedlites.
 FE lock
If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <A> button to
perform FE lock (p.232).
253
Wireless Flash PhotographyN
Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash Shooting
When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], flash exposure can be set
manually. The flash output settings that can be set ([1 flash output],
[Group A output], etc.) vary depending on the [Wireless func.] setting
(see below).
Wireless func.: 0
 Firing group: 1All
The manual flash output setting is
applied to all the external Speedlites.
 Firing group: 1 (A:B)
You can set the flash output
separately for slave groups A and B.
Wireless func.: 0+3
 Firing group: 1All and 2
The flash output can be set
separately for the external
Speedlite(s) and built-in flash.
 Firing group: 1 (A:B)2
You can set the flash output
separately for slave groups A and B.
You can also set the flash output for
the built-in flash.
254
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the
image on the camera’s LCD
monitor. This is called “Live View
shooting”.
Live View shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <A>.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake may cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.
Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.512) installed on your computer,
you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely
while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
255
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
2 Display
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The Live View image will be displayed
in the brightness level closely
matching that of the actual image to
be captured.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.276).
 You can also tap on the screen to
select the face or subject (p.286).
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <0> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
 The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with the image-recording
quality set to JPEG 73).
 In Creative Zone modes, you can check the depth of field by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button.
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.221) for Live
View shooting.
256
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [z5: Live View shoot.] (the [z3]
tab in Basic Zone modes) to [Enable].
Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
(Approx. number of shots)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
No Flash
340
310
50% Flash Use
300
270
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N and
CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, continuous Live View shooting is
possible for approx. 2 hr. 30 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F).
 In the <8: x> mode, Live View shooting is not possible.
 In the <8: FG> modes and <v: ABCD> modes, the
shooting range will be smaller.
 When the flash is recycling, “BUSY” is displayed on the LCD monitor,
and you cannot view the subject. Also, the continuous shooting speed
will decrease.
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 General Live View Shooting Cautions are on pages 290-291.
 You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
 When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot will
be taken. Also, the time it takes to capture an image after you press the
shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder shooting.
 If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.66). If [52:
Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end
automatically after approx. 30 min. (camera power remains on).
 With the HDMI cable HTC-100, you can display the Live View image on a TV
set (p.373). Note that no sound will be output. If the picture does not appear
on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For
NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).
257
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Information Display
 Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
AF method
•c: u + Tracking
•o: FlexiZone - Multi
•d: FlexiZone - Single
HDR shooting/Multiple exposures/Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Possible shots/Seconds remaining on self-timer
Maximum burst/Number of remaining multiple exposures
Battery level
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Shooting mode/
Scene icon
Histogram
Quick Control
AF operation
White balance
Drive mode
Picture Style
Metering mode
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Image-recording
quality
Creative filters
Switch to auto
selection (AF point)
Exposure simulation
Touch shutter
Magnified view
AE lock
AEB/FEB
Wi-Fi function
Shutter speed
Wireless signal strength/
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Flash-ready/Flash off
Aperture
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
GPS connection indicator
Digital compass
Exposure level indicator/AEB range
Flash exposure compensation
Electronic level
You can edit what to display when the <B> button is pressed (p.262).
258
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
 The histogram can be displayed by pressing the <B> button when
[z5: Expo. simulation: Enable] (p.271) is set. However, the histogram
is not displayed while pressing the shutter button completely.
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button
(p.72). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or the camera
is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot
be displayed.
 When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
is displayed at the brightness level closely matching that of the actual
image captured.
 If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low-or
bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that noise may be more noticeable than the
actual image recorded.
 When the <8: FG> mode is set, shooting with flash in Basic Zone
modes, or [Expo. simulation: Enable] in Creative Zone modes is set
and Multi Shot Noise Reduction, HDR mode, bulb exposure, or flash is
used, exposure simulation will not be performed (p.271). <g> icon
and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be displayed on
the LCD monitor at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be
properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.
 Exposure simulation is not performed in <v: ABCD> modes.
<g> icon will be displayed in gray. The histogram will not be
displayed.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature
contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation
problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot
places.
259
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Scene Icons
In the <A> shooting mode, the camera will detect the scene type and
set all the settings automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene
type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For certain scenes or
shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Portrait*1
Movement
Background
Non-Portrait
Background
Nature and
Color
Movement Close*2
Outdoor Scene
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With
Tripod
Dark blue
*4*5
*3
*4*5
*3
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:
The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on
a tripod.
260
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
• EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.
*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow
down.
Final Image Simulation
Final image simulation is a function that shows the Live View image as
it will look with the current settings for Picture Style, white balance, and
other shooting functions applied.
During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the
function settings listed below. However, it may be slightly different from
the resulting image.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
 Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.





White balance
White balance correction
Ambience-based shots
Lighting/scene based shots
Background blur (in <C> mode)
* You can check the effect only during the setting procedure (when
[Simulating blur] is displayed).









Color tone (in <P> mode)
Metering mode
Exposure (with [z5: Expo. simulation: Enable] set)
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
Aspect ratio (shooting range confirmation)
261
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
B Button Display Options
You can change what is displayed when the <B> button is pressed
during Live View shooting or movie shooting.
1
Select [zbutton LV display
options].
 Under the [53] tab, select
[zbutton LV display options],
then press <0>.
 Live View info switch setting
1
Select [Live View info switch
setting].
a number.
2 Select
 The numbers represent the number of
times to press the <B> button.
 Select a number for the displayed
content you want to change, then
press the <B> button.
 You can also remove the [X] mark
from a number. However, you cannot
remove the [X] mark for all the
numbers.
The default settings are shown below.
1
2
3
4
I
Basic shooting info
k
k
k
-
J
Detailed shooting info
-
k
k
-
K
On-screen buttons
k
k
k
-
L
Histogram
-
-
k
-
M
Electronic level
-
-
k
-
262
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
the options.
3 Edit
 Select what you want to display and
press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
 For what you do not want to display,
press <0> to remove the checkmark
[X].
 After completing the settings, select
[OK].
 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary.
 Histogram display
• Brightness/RGB
You can switch the histogram display between [Brightness] and
[RGB] (p.352).
Set with [Brightness/RGB] in
[Histogram disp].
• Display size
You can change the display size of the histogram.
Set with [Display size] in [Histogram
disp].
 Reset
To revert to the default settings (p.262),
select [Reset], then select [OK].
263
Shooting Function Settings
f / R / i / DSettings
When the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <f>,
<R>, <i>, or <D> button, the setting screen will appear on the
LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the
respective shooting function.
With Live View shooting, you cannot set <B> or <M> for the drive
mode. In addition, the continuous shooting settings set with viewfinder
shooting will not be maintained with Live View shooting.
When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a circle
indicating the metering area will be displayed at the center of the screen.
264
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In Creative Zone modes, you can set the following: AF method, AF
operation, Drive mode, Metering mode, Image quality, White balance,
Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, and Creative filters.
In Basic Zone modes, you can set the functions shown in the table on page
107 (except background blur) as well as the functions in bold above.
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.
a function and set it.
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select a function.
 The settings of the selected function and Feature guide (p.75)
will appear.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the function.
 In the <8> and <v> modes, select the shooting mode
option on the upper left of the screen, then press <0> to select
the shooting mode.
 To set Auto white balance, select [Q], then press <0>.
 To set the RAW image quality, WB correction/WB bracketing,
Picture Style parameters, or Creative filter effects, press the
<B> button.
 Press <0> to return to Live View shooting.
 You can also select [2] to return to Live View shooting.
With [Servo AF] (p.275), the image quality can be set to 1 or JPEG. If
41 or 61 is set, the image will be recorded in 1 quality.
265
U Applying Creative FiltersN
While viewing the Live View image, you can apply one of seven filter
effects (Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect, Water
painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect) for shooting.
The camera saves only the image with the Creative filter applied. You
can also take a picture without a Creative filter, then apply an effect
afterward and save it as a new image (p.399).
the Mode Dial to a Creative
1 Turn
Zone mode.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
[x].
3 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[x] (Creative filter) on the right side
of the screen.
a filter.
4 Select
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select a
filter (p.268).
 The image will be displayed with the
effects of the filter applied.
 For the Miniature effect, press the
<W> <X> keys to move the white
frame to where you want the image to
look sharp.
266
U Applying Creative FiltersN
the filter effect.
5 Adjust
 Press the <B> button (except for
c).
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the filter effect, then press <0>.
the picture.
6 Take
 The image is shot with the filter effct
applied.
When you set a Creative filter, single shooting will take effect even if the
drive mode is set to <o> or <i>.
 You cannot shoot with Creative filters if the recording quality is RAW or
RAW+JPEG, or if AEB, white balance bracketing, or Multi Shot Noise
Reduction is set.
 The histogram is not displayed when you shoot with Creative filters.
267
U Applying Creative FiltersN
Creative Filter Characteristics
 G Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
 W Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
 X Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter expands
the center part of the image, the resolution at the center may
decrease depending on the number of recorded pixels. Check the
image on the screen when setting this filter. The AF method will be
FlexiZone - Single (fixed at center).
 Y Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more
three-dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note
that subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered
with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or noise will become
more noticeable.
 Z Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that
some scenes including night scenes or low-light scenes may not be
rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or noise
will become more noticeable.
268
U Applying Creative FiltersN
 H Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a unique color tone that
makes it look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the
color cast by adjusting the color tone.
 c Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 4, if you press the <u> button (or tap [T] on the
screen), you can switch between the white frame’s vertical and
horizontal orientations. The AF method will be FlexiZone - Single to
focus at the center of the white frame.
 With Grainy B/W, the grainy effect displayed on the LCD monitor will look
different from the grainy effect recorded in the picture.
 With the Soft focus and Miniature effect, the blurred effect displayed on
the LCD monitor may look different from the blurred effect recorded in
the picture. You can check the picture’s blurred effect by pressing the
depth-of-field preview button.
269
3 Menu Function Settings
z5
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <A>, menu
options exclusive to the Live View
shooting will appear under the [z5] and
[z6] tabs (the [z3] tab in Basic Zone
modes).
The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View
shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings are
disabled).
 Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
 AF method
You can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone Single]. See pages 276-285 for more about the AF method.
 Touch shutter
Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take
the picture automatically. For details, see page 286.
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
270
3 Menu Function Settings
 Exposure simulationN
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness
(exposure) of the actual image will look.
• Enable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual
brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.
• During e (E/g)
Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to
make the Live View image easy to see (E). The image will be
displayed with a brightness (exposure) close to that of the actual
image to be captured only while you hold down the depth-of-field
preview button (g).
• Disable (E)
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the
Live View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure
compensation, the image is displayed at the standard brightness.
271
3 Menu Function Settings
z6 N
 Silent LV shootingN
• Mode 1
When shooting, you can suppress the mechanical sound more
than with viewfinder shooting. Continuous shooting is also
possible. If <o> is set, you can shoot at a maximum continuous
shooting speed of approx. 7.0 fps.
• Mode 2
When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will
be taken. While you are holding down the shutter button, the
camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the
shutter button’s halfway position, the camera operation will resume.
The shooting noise is thereby minimized. Even if continuous
shooting is set, only a single shot will be taken.
• Disable
Be sure to set it to [Disable] if you use a TS-E lens (other than
those listed in ) for shifting or tilting the lens or if you use an
Extension Tube. If [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] is set, the standard
exposure may not be obtained, or an irregular exposure may result.
 Between [Mode 1] and [Disable], the internal operation alone is different
between the single drive mode and the first shot during continuous
shooting. Continuous shooting with [Mode 1] will have the same
mechanical sound as the [Disable] setting for the second and
subsequent shots.
 When shooting with flash, the [Disable] setting will be applied regardless
of the [Silent LV shoot.] setting. (You cannot suppress the mechanical
sound when shooting.)
 When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not
fire if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
 If [Mode 2] is set and you use a Remote Controller (p.221), the operation
will be the same as with [Mode 1].
272
3 Menu Function Settings
With the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L II lens, you can use [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
Selecting any of the following menu items will stop Live View shooting. To
start Live View shooting again, press the <0> button.
• [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear all camera
settings], or [54: z firmware ver.].
273
Selecting the AF OperationN
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation
is set automatically for the respective shooting mode.
1 Press the <f> button.
the AF operation.
2 Select
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the desired AF operation, then press
<0>.
X: One-Shot AF
K: Servo AF
If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs, the
picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely.
Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or see “Shooting Conditions
that Make Focusing Difficult” (p.284).
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus only once.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper
will sound.
 While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is
achieved.
274
Selecting the AF OperationN
Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold
down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on
the subject continuously.
 If the drive mode is set to high-speed continuous shooting, the
maximum speed will be approx. 5.0 fps. The pictures will be taken
with priority given to the continuous shooting speed.
 If the drive mode is set to low-speed continuous shooting, the
maximum speed will be approx. 3.0 fps. The pictures will be taken
with priority given to subject tracking.
 For flash photography, the continuous shooting speed will become
slower.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue. The beeper will
not sound in this case.
 The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
 Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject, and the
subject’s speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct
focus.
 If you operate the zoom during continuous shooting, the focus may
be lost. Shoot after using the zoom to obtain the desired
composition.
 With [Servo AF], the image quality can be set to 1 or JPEG. If 41
or 61 is set, the image will be recorded in 1 quality.
 When [Servo AF] is set and Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, [High ISO
speed NR] will automatically switch to [Standard].
275
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
Selecting the AF Method
You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your
subject. The following AF methods are provided: [u(face)+Tracking]
(p.277), [FlexiZone - Multi] (p.279), and [FlexiZone - Single] (p.281).
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.288).
1
Press the <f> button.
the AF method.
2 Select
 Turn the <6> dial to select the AF
method, then press <0>.
 You can also set the AF method with [z5: AF method] (the [z3] tab in
Basic Zone modes).
 The procedures on pages 277-282 assume that One-Shot AF is set. If
Servo AF is set, the AF point will turn blue when focus is achieved. The
beeper will not sound in this case (p.274).
 In the <8: 5C> modes, Servo AF is set automatically and when
focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue and the beeper will sound.
276
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
u(face)+Tracking:c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the
AF point <p> also moves to track the face.
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
the AF point.
2 Check
 When a face is detected, the area
Area frame
frame and the <p> frame will appear
on the face for focusing.
 If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Use the <9> to
move the <q> frame over the face
you want to focus on.
 You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to select the face or subject. If
the subject is not a face, <z> will be
displayed.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
 If no faces can be detected or if you
do not tap on the LCD monitor, the
camera will switch to FlexiZone Multi with automatic selection (p.279).
 When focus is achieved, the AF point will
turn green and the beeper will sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.256).
277
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
 Focusing on a subject other than a human face
Press <0> or <L> and the AF frame <z> will appear at the
screen’s center. Then use <9> to move the AF frame over the
desired subject. Once the AF frame <z> achieves focus, it will track
the subject even if the subject moves or if you change the
composition.
 If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. Adjust the focus manually (p.288) so that the face can be
detected, then perform AF.
 An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
 Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
 The <p> may cover only a part of the face.
 Use the area frame as a guide, and focus within the area frame.
 The size of the AF frame changes depending on the subject.
278
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Multi: o
You can use up to 35 AF points for wide-area focusing (automatic
selection). This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing
(zone selection).
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
Area frame
the AF point.O
2 Select
 Pressing <0> or the <L> button
will toggle between automatic
selection and zone selection. In Basic
Zone modes, automatic selection is
set automatically.
 Use <9> to select the zone. To
return to the center zone, press <0>
or the <L> button again.
 You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to select a zone. When a zone
is selected, tap [w] on the screen
to switch to automatic selection.
279
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the area
frame will turn orange.
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.256).
 If the camera does not focus on the desired target subject with automatic
AF point selection, select a zone or switch the AF method to [FlexiZone
- Single] and refocus.
 The number of AF points varies, depending on the [z4: Aspect ratio]
setting. At [3:2], there are 35 AF points. At [4:3] and [1:1], there are 25
AF points. And at [16:9], 21 AF points. Also, at [16:9], there are three
zones.
 For movie shooting, there are 21 AF points and three zones.
280
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Single: d
The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you
want to focus on a particular subject.
1
AF point
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The AF point < > will appear.
 During movie shooting, if [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF
point will be displayed in a larger size.
the AF point.
2 Move
 Use <9> to move the AF point to
where you want to focus. (It cannot
be moved to the edge of the screen.)
 Pressing <0> or the <L> button
will return the AF point to the screen’s
center.
 You can also tap on the LCD monitor
screen to move the AF point.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
281
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.256).
282
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
Notes for AF
AF Operation
 Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway
will focus again.
 The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
 Depending on the subject or shooting conditions, etc., focusing may
take longer or the continuous shooting speed may become slower.
 If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and perform AF under the actual light source
under which you are shooting.
Magnified View
 If [u+Tracking] is set, magnified view is not possible.
 When [FlexiZone - Multi] is set and you press the <u> button (or
tap <1> on the screen), the center of the selected zone (or image
center with automatic selection) will be magnified. If you press the
shutter button halfway, the display will return to normal and the
camera will focus.
 When [FlexiZone - Single] is set and you press the <u> button (or
tap <1> on the screen), the area covered by the AF point will be
magnified. Press the shutter button halfway to focus in the magnified
view. This is effective when the camera is attached to a tripod and
you need to attain very precise focus. If focusing is difficult in
magnified view, return to the normal display and use AF. Note that
the AF speed differs between the normal and magnified views.
 If you magnify the view after focusing with [FlexiZone - Multi] or
[FlexiZone - Single] in the normal view, precise focus may not be
achieved.
 In Servo AF mode, when you press the shutter button halfway in the
magnified view, the display will return to normal and the camera will
focus.
283
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
 Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces
or when highlight or shadow details are lost.
 Subjects in low light.
 Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
 Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
 Fine lines and subject outlines.
 Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
 Night scenes or points of light.
 The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting.
 Extremely small subjects.
 Subjects at the edge of the picture.
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Cars with highly
reflective bodies, etc.).
 The AF point covers both near and distant subjects (Example:
Animal in a cage, etc.).
 Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
 Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
 Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
 A special effect filter is used.
 Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
284
Focusing with AF (AF Method)
 If focus is not achieved with the shooting conditions listed on the
preceding page, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus
manually.
 Depending on the lens used, focusing may take longer or correct focus
may not be achieved.
 If you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus, aim the
center AF point or zone over the subject to focus, focus again and then
take the picture.
 The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series
Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED
light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.
 In magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
285
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the
picture automatically. This works in all shooting modes.
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
the touch shutter.
2 Enable
 Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.
Each time you tap on the icon, it will
toggle between [y] and [x].
 [x] (Touch shutter: Enable)
You can tap on the spot to focus and
shoot.
 [y] (Touch shutter: Disable)
You can tap on a spot to perform
focusing on where you want to focus.
Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
on the screen to shoot.
3 Tap
 Tap on the face or subject on the
screen.
 On the point you tap, the camera will
focus with the AF method that was
set (p.276-282).
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
turns green and the picture is taken
automatically.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
turns orange and the picture cannot
be taken. Tap on the face or subject
on the screen again.
286
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter
 Even if you set the drive mode to <o> or <i>, the camera will still
shoot in single shooting mode.
 When you tap on the screen, focusing will be performed with One-Shot
AF regardless of the [x: Touch shutter] or [AF operation] settings.
 The touch shutter does not work with the magnified view.
 If the Fish-eye effect Creative filter is set, the camera will focus using the
AF point at the center of the screen regardless of the point you tap on.
 If the Miniature effect Creative filter is set, the touch shutter does not
work.
 If [FlexiZone - Multi] and [y Touch shutter: Disable] are set with a
Basic Zone mode, focusing cannot be performed by tapping on the
screen.
 When [V Shutter butt. half-press] is set to [Metering start] or [AE
lock (while button pressed)] under [8 C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls],
autofocusing does not take effect.
 You can also set the touch shutter with [z5: Touch Shutter] (the [z3]
tab in Basic Zone modes).
 To shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The first tap on the
screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the
exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the
screen.
287
MF: Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus.
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
 Turn the lens focusing ring to focus
roughly.
the magnifying frame.
2 Display
 Press the <u> button.
 The magnifying frame will appear.
 You can also tap [1] on the screen to
magnify the image.
Magnifying frame
the magnifying frame.
3 Move
 Use <9> to move the magnifying
frame to the position where you want
to focus. You can also tap it to move
it.
 Pressing <0> or <L> button will
return the magnifying frame to the
screen’s center.
the image.
4 Magnify
 Each time you press the <u> button,
the magnification of the image will
change in the following sequence:
Normal view 9 1x 9 5x 9 10x
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification (Approx.)
288
 While in magnified view, you can use
<9> or tap the directional wedges
displayed on the top, bottom, left, and
right of the screen to scroll around the
magnified image.
MF: Focusing Manually
manually.
5 Focus
 While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
 After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
the picture.
6 Take
 Check the exposure, then press the
shutter button completely to take the
picture (p.256).
In magnified view, the exposure is locked. (Shutter speed and aperture will
be displayed in red.)
289
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
 If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the
camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may
deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.
 If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red
<E> icon will appear.
 The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View
shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.
 The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or
turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
 Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, always turn off the camera.
 If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot
with high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the
white <s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Results
 In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
red. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come
out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
 Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image area for the
normal view will be captured.
290
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image
 Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
 Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have less noise. (The image quality of the Live View image
is different from that of the recorded image.)
 If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume Live
View shooting under the actual light source.
 If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
 In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
 When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Custom Functions
 During Live View shooting, certain Custom Function settings will not take
effect (p.411).
Lens and Flash
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number of
possible shots depending on the shooting conditions. When the Image
Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is
recommended to set the IS switch to <2>.
 The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode
released in and after the second half of 2011.
 FE lock will not work if the built-in flash is used. FE lock and modeling
flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.
291
MEMO
292
8
Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <k>.
 For cards that can record movies, see page 5.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera
shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is
recommended in such cases.
Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with HighDefinition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
293
k Shooting Movies
Autoexposure Shooting
Autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current
brightness.
the Mode Dial to a mode other
1 Set
than <v> and <a>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
 The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.276-285, 288).
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method.
the movie.
4 Shoot
 Press the <0> button to start
Recording movie
Microphones
294
shooting a movie.
 While the movie is being shot, the [o]
mark will be displayed on the upper
right of the screen.
 Sound will be recorded by the built-in
microphones.
 To stop shooting the movie, press the
<0> button again.
k Shooting Movies
 In Basic Zone modes, the shooting result will be the same as with <A>.
Also, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed
on the upper left (p.297).
 In the <s>, <f>, and <F> shooting modes, the settings will be the
same as when shooting in the <d> mode.
 Settable menu functions differ between Basic Zone modes and Creative
Zone modes (p.477).
 In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <A> button (p.203) to lock
the exposure (AE lock). After applying AE lock during movie shooting,
you can cancel it by pressing the <S> button. (AE lock setting is
retained until you press the <S> button.)
 In Creative Zone modes, you can set the <R> switch downward
and turn the <5> dial to set the exposure compensation.
 If you shoot a movie with autoexposure, the ISO speed, shutter speed,
and aperture will not be recorded in the movie’s Exif information.
 With autoexposure (modes other than a) movie shooting, the camera
will automatically turn on the Speedlite’s LED light under low-light
conditions. For details, refer to the instruction manual of an EX-series
Speedlite equipped with an LED light.
295
k Shooting Movies
ISO Speed in Basic Zone Modes
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 12800.
ISO Speed in the d, s, f, and F Modes
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 12800.
 In [Range for movies] under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set
[Maximum] to [H(25600)], the automatic setting range will be
expanded to H (equivalent to ISO 25600). Even if you set
[Minimum] to ISO 200 or higher and [Maximum] to ISO 3200 or
lower, the range will be set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 automatically
(p.332).
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.174), the ISO
speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], [Auto range] and [Min. shutter
spd.] cannot be set (p.152-153) for movie shooting.
 Since shooting a movie at ISO 16000 may result in much noise, it is
designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “H”).
 When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the
ISO speed settings before shooting movies.
296
k Shooting Movies
Scene Icons
During movie shooting in a Basic Zone mode (except the <v> mode),
an icon representing the scene detected by the camera will be
displayed, and the shooting will be performed to suit the scene. For
certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not
match the actual scene.
Subject
Background
Non-Portrait
Portrait*1
Nature and
Outdoor Scene
Close*2
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blue
Dark
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.
297
k Shooting Movies
Manual Exposure Shooting
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie
shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users.
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the ISO speed.
3 Set
 Press the <i> button.
 The ISO speed setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor.
 Turn the <6> dial to set the ISO
speed.
 For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
the shutter speed and
4 Set
aperture.
Shutter speed
Aperture
 Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
 To set the shutter speed, turn the <6>
dial. The settable shutter speeds vary
depending on the frame rate.
• 5 4 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/25 sec.
•6
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
•7
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/50 sec.
•8
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
 To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch downward, then turn the
<6> or <5> dial.
and shoot the movie.
5 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.294).
298
k Shooting Movies
ISO Speed During Manual Exposure Shooting
 With [Auto] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - ISO 12800. In [Range for movies] under [z2: ISO speed
settings], if you set [Maximum] to [H(25600)], the automatic setting
range will be expanded to H (equivalent to ISO 25600). Even if you
set [Minimum] to ISO 200 or higher and [Maximum] to ISO 3200 or
lower, the range will be set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 automatically
(p.332).
 You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 12800 in
1/3-stop increments. In [Range for movies] under [z2: ISO speed
settings], if you set [Maximum] to [H(25600)], the automatic setting
range will be expanded to H (equivalent to ISO 25600) (p.332).
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.174), the ISO
speed will be ISO 200 - ISO 12800.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], [Auto range] and [Min. shutter
spd.] (p.152-153) cannot be set for movie shooting.
 Since shooting a movie at ISO 16000 may result in much noise, it is
designated as an expanded ISO speed (displayed as “H”).
 When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the
ISO speed settings before shooting movies.
 Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
 When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed within
approx. 1/30 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter
speed, the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.
 If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
 Under [8C.FnIII-4: Custom Controls], if [s: Expo comp (hold btn,
turn S)] is set (p.438), you can set exposure compensation while ISO
Auto is set.
 When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.300)
compared to when the <A> button is pressed.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can display the histogram.
299
k Shooting Movies
Information Display
 Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
AF method
• c: u + Tracking
• o: FlexiZone - Multi
• d: FlexiZone - Single
Movie shooting mode/
Scene icon
y : Autoexposure
(Basic Zone
modes)
l : Autoexposure
(Creative filters)
k : Autoexposure
(Creative Zone
modes)
M : Manual
exposure
N : Time-lapse
movie
Movie shooting remaining time* / Elapsed time
Battery level
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Quick Control
White balance
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Movie recording size
Frame rate
Video snapshot
Digital zoom
GPS connection
indicator
Recording level:
Manual
Magnify/Digital zoom
Movie Servo AF
Creative filters
Headphone volume
Digital compass
AE lock
ISO speed
Movie recording format
Shutter speed
Wi-Fi function
Wireless signal strength/Eye-Fi
card transmission status
Aperture
Wind filter: Disable
* Applies to a single movie clip.
300
Highlight tone priority
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation
Attenuator
Level meter
k Shooting Movies
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button
(p.72).
 You can edit what to display when the <B> button is pressed (p.262).
 Note that if the AF method is set to [u +Tracking] or the camera is
connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.373), the electronic level
cannot be displayed.
 The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during
movie shooting. (The display will disappear when you start shooting a
movie.)
 When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
Final Image Simulation
Final image simulation is a function that shows the movie as it will look
with the current settings for Picture Style, white balance and other
shooting functions applied.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the
effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
 Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.










White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field (except during time-lapse movie shooting)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
HDR movie
Creative filters
301
k Shooting Movies
Still Photo Shooting
Still photo shooting is not possible during movie shooting. To
shoot still photos, stop shooting the movie and perform viewfinder
shooting or Live View shooting.
Cautions for Movie Shooting
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 When you press the shutter button halfway to autofocus during movie
shooting, the following phenomena may occur.
• Focus may become far off momentarily.
• The brightness of the recorded movie may change.
• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.
• The movie may record the lens mechanical sound.
 If <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during
movie shooting, the white balance may also change.
 If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may
flicker.
 Shooting a few test movies is recommended where you will perform
zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie shooting may
result in recording of changes in exposure or mechanical sound of the
lens, or images may be out of focus.
 During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press
the <u> button.
 Be careful not to cover the built-in microphones (p.294) with your finger, etc.
 If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting, the
movie shooting will end.
 General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 343-344.
 If necessary, also read General Live View Shooting Cautions on
pages 290-291.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature
contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation
problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot
places.
302
k Shooting Movies
Notes for Movie Shooting
 Movie-related settings are under the [z4] and [z5] tabs (p.326). (In
Basic Zone modes, they are under the [z2] and [z3] tabs.)
 A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size
exceeds 4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent 4 GB
(p.309).
 The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (with movie recording
size set to [1920x1080]).
 You can also focus on the image by pressing the <p> button.
 Stereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphones.
 Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting the Directional
Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to the camera’s external
microphone IN terminal (p.26) as the external microphone is given the
priority.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the total movie shooting time
will be as follows: approx. 1 hr. 50 min. at room temperature (23°C /
73°F) and approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at low temperatures (0°C / 32°F) (with
[z4: Movie Servo AF: Disable] set).
 The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a
(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, released in
and after the second half of 2011.
303
Shooting Function Settings
f / i Settings
If you press the <f> button while the image is displayed on the LCD
monitor, the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can
turn the <6> dial to set the AF method.
 During manual exposure shooting (p.298), you can press the <i>
button to set the ISO speed.
 <R> drive mode and <D> metering mode cannot be set.
304
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In Creative Zone modes, the AF method, Movie recording size,
Digital zoom, Recording level (set manually only), Volume
(headphones), White balance, Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer,
Creative filters, and Video snapshot can be set.
In Basic Zone modes, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The settable selected function will be
displayed.
 [HDR Movie Shooting] is settable
only in Basic Zone modes (p.314).
a function and set it.
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
function.
 The settings of the selected function
and Feature guide (p.75) will appear
on the screen.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to set the
function.
 To set Auto white balance, select
[Q], then press <0>.
 To set the WB correction, Picture
Style parameters, or Creative filters,
press the <B> button.
 Pressing <0> will return the camera
to movie shooting.
 You can also select [2] to return to
movie shooting.
305
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
With [z4: Movie rec quality] (the [z2]
tab in Basic Zone modes), you can set
the movie recording format, movie
recording size (image size, frame rate,
and compression method), and other
functions.
MOV/MP4
You can select the movie’s recording format.
D MOV
The movie is recorded in the MOV
format (file extension: “.MOV”).
Convenient for editing with a computer.
C MP4
The movie is recorded in the MP4 format (file extension: “.MP4”). This
format is compatible with a larger range of playback systems than the
MOV format.
306
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
Movie Recording Size
You can select the movie’s size, frame rate, and compression method.
 Image Size
L 1920x1080
Full High-Definition (Full HD)
recording quality. The aspect ratio is
16:9.
w 1280x720
High-Definition (HD) recording
quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
 Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)
6 29.97 fps/8 59.94 fps
For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.).
5 25.00 fps/7 50.00 fps
For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).
4 23.98 fps
Mainly for motion pictures.
The frame rate displayed on the movie recording size screen switches
depending on whether [53: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For
PAL] (p.475). 4 (23.98 fps) can be selected only when [For NTSC] is set.
307
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
 Compression Method
Fixed at W if the recording format is MOV. For the MP4 format,
X or Xv can be selected.
• In MOV Format
W ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Compresses one frame at a time for recording. Although the file
size is larger than with IPB (Standard) and IPB (Light), the movie is
better suited for editing.
• In MP4 Format
X IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording.
Xv IPB (Light)
Records a movie at a bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard),
resulting in a smaller file size and compatibility with a larger range
of playback systems.
If you change the [53: Video system] setting, set the movie recording size
again.
308
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
 In MOV Format
Movie Recording
Quality
L 654
W
(Approx.)
Total Recording Time on Card
4 GB
16 GB
5 min.
23 min.
64 GB
1 hr. 33 min. 654 MB/min.
 In MP4 Format
Movie Recording
Quality
File Size
(Approx.)
Total Recording Time on Card
4 GB
File Size
16 GB
64 GB
35 min.
2 hr. 21 min.
431 MB/min.
1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 41 min.
216 MB/min.
87
X
8 min.
L 654
X
17 min.
65
Xv
43 min.
2 hr. 53 min. 11 hr. 35 min.
87 MB/min.
87
X
20 min.
1 hr. 21 min. 5 hr. 24 min.
184 MB/min.
65
Xv
2 hr. 5 min.
8 hr. 20 min. 33 hr. 22 min.
30 MB/min.
17 min.
1 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 41 min.
216 MB/min.
w
HDR Movie Shooting
 Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
During movie shooting, if the file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie
file will be created automatically.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next
movie to be played back.
 An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie
shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table
(p.343).
 If the file size exceeds 4 GB during movie shooting, “buSY” may be
displayed on the LCD panel for a while.
309
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
 Movie Shooting Time Limit
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by
pressing the <0> button. (The movie will be recorded as a new
movie file.)
310
3 Using Movie Digital Zoom
When the recording size is L6/4 (NTSC) or L5 (PAL),
you can shoot with an approx. 3x to 10x digital zoom (except in <v>
mode).
1
Select [Digital zoom].
 Under the [z4] tab (the [z2] tab in
Basic Zone modes), select [Digital
zoom] and press <0>.
[Approx. 3-10x zoom].
2 Select
 Select [Approx. 3-10x zoom], then
press <0>.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to movie shooting.
digital zoom.
3 Use
 Press the <W> <X> keys.
 The digital zoom bar will appear.
 Press the <W> key to zoom in or
press the <X> key to zoom out.
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
[FlexiZone - Single] (fixed at center).
 To cancel digital zoom, set [Disable]
in step 2.
 Use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
 When movie digital zoom is set, the maximum ISO speed will be ISO
6400.
 Since movie digital zoom processes the image digitally, the image will
look grainier at higher magnifications. Noise, dots of light, etc., may also
become noticeable.
 When movie digital zoom is set, the scene icon will not be displayed.
 Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
284.
311
3 Setting the Sound Recording
You can shoot movies while recording
sound with the built-in stereo
microphones or the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately).
You can also freely adjust the soundrecording level.
Set the sound recording with [z4:
Sound recording].
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
[Auto]
: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto
level control will operate automatically in response to the
sound level.
[Manual] : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording
level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and turn the <5> dial while looking at
the level meter to adjust the sound-recording level. Look at
the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the level meter
sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (-12 dB) mark
for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the sound will be
distorted.
[Disable] : Sound will not be recorded.
Wind Filter/Attenuator
[Wind filter] : When set to [Auto], it reduces wind noise when there is
wind outdoors. This feature takes effect only with the
built-in microphones. When the wind filter function takes
effect, low bass sounds will also be reduced.
[Attenuator]: Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by
loud noises. Even if you set [Sound recording] to [Auto]
or [Manual] before shooting, sound distortion may still
result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case, setting
it to [Enable] is recommended.
312
3 Setting the Sound Recording
 Using Microphones
Normally, the built-in microphones will record stereo sound.
Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting the
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.26) as the external
microphone is given the priority.
 Using Headphones
By connecting stereo headphones (commercially-available)
equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug to the camera’s
headphone terminal (p.26), you can listen to the sound during movie
shooting. To adjust the headphones’ sound volume, press the <Q>
button and select <y>. Then turn <5> to adjust (p.305).
You can also use headphones during movie playback.
 When using headphones for audio, noise reduction will not be applied to
the headphone output. Because of this, what you hear will differ from the
actual audio recorded with the movie.
 An external microphone may pick up noise while wireless functions are in
use. Keep a distance between the camera and microphone.
 In Basic Zone modes, the settings available for [z2: Sound recording]
will be [On/Off]. If [On] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted
automatically (same as with [Auto]), and the wind filter function will take
effect.
 The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
 Audio is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
313
Shooting HDR Movies
You can shoot movies by reducing the clipped highlight details of bright
areas even in high-contrast scenes. This function is settable in Basic
Zone modes (except the <v> mode).
HDR movie can be set when the MP4 format is set and the recording
size is L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL).
1
Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone
mode.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
[4].
3 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[4] (HDR Movie Shooting) on the
screen’s right side.
[Enable].
4 Select
 For recording time and file sizes, see
the table on page 309.
314
Shooting HDR Movies
 Since multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, a part of the
movie may be distorted. During shooting while handholding the camera,
the distortion caused by camera shake may be more noticeable. Using a
tripod is recommended. Note that even if a tripod is used for shooting,
afterimages may be noticeable or noise may look increased when the
HDR movie is played back frame-by-frame or in slow-motion compared
to normal playback.
 HDR movie shooting cannot be set if movie digital zoom, video snapshot,
or time-lapse movie is set.
315
v Shooting Movies with Creative Filters
In the <v> (Creative filters) mode, you can shoot movies with one of
five filter effects (Memory, Dream, Old Movies, Dramatic B&W, and
Miniature effect movie).
The recording size can be set to L6/4 (NTSC) or L5
(PAL).
1
Set the Mode Dial to <v>.
the <Q> button (7).
2 Press
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
[l].
3 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[l] (Creative filters) on the upper left
of the screen, then press <0>.
a filter effect.
4 Select
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to select a filter (p.317-318),
then press <0> and select [OK].
 The image will be displayed with the
effects of the filter applied.
 For the Miniature effect movie, press
the <W> <X> keys to move the white
frame to where you want the image to
look sharp.
316
v Shooting Movies with Creative Filters
the filter effect level.
5 Adjust
 Press the Q button and select the
icon below [Creative filters].
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust
the filter effect, then press <0>.
 When the Miniature effect movie is
set, select the playback speed.
6 Shoot the movie.
 Magnified view is not possible.
 The histogram is not displayed.
 It is not possible to set movie digital zoom, video snapshot, or time-lapse
movie.
In Creative Zone modes, use the Quick Control to set a Creative filter
(p.305).
Creative Filter Characteristics
 k Memory
Creates the atmosphere of a distant memory. Gives the movie a soft
look overall, reducing brightness of the periphery of the screen. You
can modify the overall saturation and the dark areas along the
screen edges by adjusting the filter effect.
 l Dream
Creates a soft, dreamy, otherworldly atmosphere. Gives the movie a
soft look overall, blurring the periphery of the screen. You can adjust
the blurry areas along the screen edges.
 m Old Movies
Creates an atmosphere like an old film by adding wavering,
scratches, and flickering effects to the image. (The top and bottom of
the screen are masked in black.) You can modify the wavering and
scratch effects by adjusting the filter effect.
317
v Shooting Movies with Creative Filters
 n Dramatic B&W
Creates an atmosphere of dramatic realism with high-contrast black
and white. You can adjust the graininess and black-and-white effect.
 o Miniature effect movie
You can shoot movies having a Miniature (diorama) effect. Select
the playback speed and shoot. You can change where the image
looks sharp. In step 4, if you press the <u> button (or tap [T] on
the bottom right of the screen), you can switch between the white
frame’s vertical and horizontal orientations. In step 5, set the
playback speed to [5x], [10x], or [20x] and shoot. The AF method
will be FlexiZone - Single to focus on the center of the white frame.
The white frame is not displayed during shooting.
Playback Speed and Length (for 1-minute movie)
Speed
Playback Length
5x
Approx. 12 sec.
10x
Approx. 6 sec.
20x
Approx. 3 sec.
 A smooth gradation of the color of the sky or white walls may not be
reproduced. Irregular exposure, irregular colors, or noise may appear.
<o> Miniature Effect Movies
 Sound will not be recorded.
 Since sound will not be output during shooting, you cannot listen to the
sound even if you connect headphones to the camera.
 Movie Servo AF will not function.
 Miniature effect movies whose playback time is shorter than 1 sec.
cannot be edited (p.367).
318
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically
to create a time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject
changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took. It
is effective for a fixed-point observation of changing scenery, growing
plants, celestial motion, etc.
Time-lapse movies are recorded in the MOV format and in L6W
(NTSC) or L5W (PAL) recording size.
the Mode Dial to a mode other
1 Set
than <v>.
[Time-lapse movie].
2 Select
 Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in
Basic Zone modes), select [Timelapse movie] and press <0>.
[Enable].
3 Select
 Select [Enable], then press the
<B> button.
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or
an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or
the camera’s internal components.
319
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the shooting interval and
4 Set
number of shots.
Time required
Playback
time
 Check the [k: Time required] and
[3: Playback time] displayed at the
bottom of the screen to set the
shooting interval and number of shots.
 Select the number to be set (hours:
minutes: seconds / number of shots).
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>.)
 Shooting interval
Settable from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
 Number of shots
Settable from [0002] to [3600]. Set one digit at a time. If 3600 is set,
the time-lapse movie will be approx. 2 min. for NTSC and approx. 2
min. 24 sec. for PAL.
[OK].
5 Select
 The screen for step 2 will reappear.
the settings.
6 Check
 With [Time-lapse movie] selected on
the screen in step 2, press <0>.
 The current settings will be displayed.
 Time required
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the
set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
 Playback time
Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the
movie) to create the time-lapse movie in L 6W (NTSC) or
L 5W (PAL) from the still photos taken with the set intervals.
320
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 Card- time left
The total length of a time-lapse movie that can be recorded on the
card based on its remaining capacity.
the menu.
7 Exit
 Press the <M> button to turn off
the menu screen.
the message.
8 Read
 Read the message and select [OK].
test shots.
9 Take
 Set the exposure and shooting
functions, and press the shutter
button halfway to focus as you do
with Live View shooting.
 Press the shutter button completely to
start taking test shots. The test
images will be recorded to the card.
 If there are no problems with the test
shots, go to the next step.
 To take test shots again, repeat this
step.
the <0> button.
10 Press
 The camera will be ready to start
shooting a time-lapse movie.
 To return to step 9, press the <0>
button again.
321
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the time-lapse movie.
11 Shoot
 Press the shutter button halfway to
Shots remaining
Time-lapse movie
check the focus and exposure.
 Press the shutter button completely to
start shooting the time-lapse movie.
 AF will not work during time-lapse
movie shooting. The exposure setting
for the first shot will be applied to
subsequent shots.
 During time-lapse movie shooting,
nothing will be displayed on the LCD
monitor. <N> will blink on the LCD
panel.
 Since the electronic shutter is used
for shooting, the reflex mirror and
shutter make no mechanical sound
during time-lapse movie shooting.
 When the set number of shots are
taken, the time-lapse movie shooting
will stop and be automatically canceled.
 Using a tripod is recommended.
 Taking test shots is recommended.
 To cancel the time-lapse movie shooting before it is completed, either
press the shutter button completely or press the <0> button ([Disable]
is set). The time-lapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.
 You can play back the shot time-lapse movie with this camera the same
way that you play back normal movies.
 If the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than
48, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the
number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.
 Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie
file will still be created. For [Playback time], “00:00:00” will be displayed.
 If the shooting time is long, using DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately)
and AC Adapter AC-E6 (sold separately) is recommended.
 When shooting in Basic Zone modes, the scene icon for the scene
detected by the camera is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.260).
322
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 With time-lapse movie set to [Enable], you cannot set [z4: Movie rec
quality] and [53: Video system].
 Cannot be set when movie digital zoom is set.
 If the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable, or if an
HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot select [Enable].
 The maximum ISO speed will be ISO 6400 in the <d>, <s>, <f>,
and <F> modes, and in the <a> mode with ISO Auto set.
 If the shooting mode is <f>, <s> or <F>, the operation will be the
same as the <d> mode.
 Movie Servo AF will not function.
 The shutter speed will be in the range from 1/4000 to 30 sec.
 If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie may
not be displayed properly (may differ from that of the resulting movie).
 Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie shooting. Zooming the
lens may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or
the lens aberration correction not to function properly.
 When shooting a time-lapse movie under a flickering light, noticeable
image flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be
recorded.
 The image displayed during time-lapse movie shooting and the resulting
movie may look different (in terms of flicker, depth of field, etc.).
 If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject while shooting a time-lapse movie, the image may look extremely
distorted.
 During time-lapse movie shooting, auto power off will not take effect.
Also, you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function
settings, or play back images.
 Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.
 The shooting function settings for the first shot will be applied to
subsequent shots.
 If a long exposure or shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is
set, the camera cannot shoot with the set interval. Also, shooting may
not be performed when the shutter speed and the shooting interval are
nearly the same.
 If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may
make the time-lapse movie’s recording time shorter.
323
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the interval between
shots due to the shooting functions set or card performance, shooting
with the set interval may not be performed.
 The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel
the time-lapse movie shooting after only one shot is taken, it will be
recorded as a movie file.
 If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of
shots, [Playback time] will be displayed in red. Although the camera can
continue shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.
 If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable
provided with the camera and use EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5:
Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If it is set to [Enable], the camera
cannot communicate with the computer.
 During time-lapse movie shooting, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not
operate.
 If the power switch is set to <2> or the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is operated, time-lapse movie shooting will be terminated
and the setting is switched to [Disable].
 Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
 Shooting-ready state of the time-lapse movie is canceled and the setting
is switched to [Disable] with any of the following operations:
• Selecting [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54:
Clear all camera settings], or [54: zfirmware ver.].
• Selecting <w> or <x> shooting modes.
 When time-lapse movie shooting ends, the settings are cleared
automatically, and the camera returns to normal movie shooting. Note
that if you have set the shutter speed slower than 1/60 sec. for timelapse movie shooting and the settings are automatically cleared, the
shutter speed may be automatically changed to a speed within the
settable range for normal movie shooting.
324
N Shooting Time-lapse Movies
You can perform time-lapse movie shooting with a fully-charged Battery
Pack LP-E6N for the approximate durations (from start of shooting until the
battery is exhausted) listed in the table below. Possible time for time-lapse
movie shooting will vary depending on the shooting conditions.
Approximate Total Possible Time for Time-lapse Movie Shooting (Approx.)
Room Temperature Low Temperatures
(23°C / 73°F)
(0°C / 32°F)
Shooting interval: 1 sec.
3 hr. 50 min.
3 hr. 20 min.
Shooting interval: 10 sec.
5 hr.
4 hr. 30 min.
You can start or stop the time-lapse movie shooting using Remote Controller
RC-6 (sold separately, p.221). Set [z5: Remote control] to [Enable]
beforehand.
When Using Remote Controller RC-6
Camera Status/
<2> (2-sec. delay)
Remote Control Setting
<o> (Immediate
shooting)
Test-shooting screen
To shooting-ready
Shoots still photo
To test-shooting
screen
Starts shooting
Ends shooting
Ends shooting
Shooting-ready
During time-lapse movie
shooting
325
3 Menu Function Settings
z4
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <k>, the
movie shooting menu options will appear
under the [z4] and [z5] tabs (the
[z2] and [z3] tabs in Basic Zone
modes).
 Movie Servo AF
With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject
continuously during movie shooting. The default setting is [Enable].
When [Enable] is set:
• The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you
are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
• If you want to keep the focus at a specific point, or if you do not
want the lens mechanical sound to be recorded, you can
temporarily stop Movie Servo AF as follows. When you stop Movie
Servo AF, the AF point will turn gray. When you perform the same
steps below, Movie Servo AF will resume.
• Tap the [Z] icon on the lower left of the screen.
• Press the <D> button.
• Under [8C.Fn III-4: Custom controls], if a button is assigned
with [AF stop], you can pause the Movie Servo AF while holding
down that button. When you let go of the button, Movie Servo AF
will resume.
• While Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting
after operations such as pressing the <M> or <x> button, or
changing the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.
When [Disable] is set:
• Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to
focus.
326
3 Menu Function Settings
 AF method
The AF methods are the same as described on pages 276-285. You
can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone Single].
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
 Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
284.
 Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery power and
shorten the total possible movie shooting time (p.309).
 With certain lenses, the lens mechanical sound during focusing may be
recorded. If this happens, use the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1
(sold separately) to reduce the lens mechanical sound in the movie. Also,
using certain USM lenses (for example, the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
USM) or certain STM lenses (for example, the EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
STM) will reduce the lens mechanical sound to be recorded.
 Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or in magnified view.
 During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie
image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image
magnification).
 If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during Movie
Servo AF, first set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to
<A>.
327
3 Menu Function Settings
 Movie recording quality
You can set the movie recording format (MOV or MP4) and movie
recording size. For details, see page 306.
 Digital zoom
You can use digital zoom for telephoto shooting. For details, see
page 311.
 Sound recording
You can set the sound-recording functions. For details, see page
312.
328
3 Menu Function Settings
 Movie Servo AF speedO
You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF
speed and its operation conditions.
This function is settable when [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [AF
method] is set to [FlexiZone - Single].
Additionally, the function is enabled
when using a lens supporting slow focus
transition during movie shooting*.
When active : [Always on] sets the AF adjustment speed to take effect
at all times for movie shooting (before and during movie
shooting). [During shooting] sets the AF adjustment
speed to take effect only during movie shooting.
AF speed
: You can adjust the AF speed (focus transition speed)
from standard speed to slow (one of seven levels) or
fast (one of two levels), to obtain the desired effect for
movie creation.
* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting
USM lenses released in and after 2009 (for example, the EF-S 18135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM) and STM lenses (for example, the EF-S 1855mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM) support slow focus transition during movie
shooting. For details, refer to the Canon Web site.
If [AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Multi], the operation
will be the same as when [AF speed] is set to [Standard (0)].
329
3 Menu Function Settings
 Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivityO
You can change the Movie Servo AF’s
tracking sensitivity to one of seven
levels. This affects the responsiveness of
AF tracking sensitivity when the AF
points stray from the subject, such as
during panning or when an obstacle cuts
across the AF points.
This function is settable when [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [AF
method] is set to [FlexiZone - Single].
Locked on: -3/-2/-1
This setting makes the camera less inclined to track a different subject if
the AF point loses the original subject. The closer the setting is to the
minus (-) symbol, the less the camera is inclined to track a different
subject. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF points from
rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during
panning or when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.
Responsive: +1/+2/+3
This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that
covers the AF point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+) symbol, the
more responsive the camera is. It is effective when you want to keep
tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera changes, or
to rapidly focus on another subject.
If [AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Multi], the tracking
sensitivity will be equivalent to the [0] setting.
330
3 Menu Function Settings
z5
 Metering timerO
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
 V button function
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button
halfway or completely during movie shooting.
Setting
Pressed Halfway
Pressed Completely
a/-
Metering and AF
No function (disabled)
q/-
Metering only
No function (disabled)
a/k
Metering and AF
Starts/stops movie shooting
q/k
Metering only
Starts/stops movie shooting
If [a/k] or [q/k] is set, besides pressing the <0> button, you
can start/stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter button
completely or by using Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately, p.221).
 Even if you set [V btn function] to [q/-] or [q/k], AF will be
performed when you press the shutter button halfway during time-lapse
movie shooting.
 During movie shooting, the [V btn function] setting overrides any
function assigned to the shutter button with [8C.Fn III-4: Custom
Controls].
331
3 Menu Function Settings
 Video snapshot
You can shoot video snapshots. For details, see page 333.
 Time-lapse movie
You can shoot time-lapse movies. For details, see page 319.
 Remote control shooting
When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie shooting using
Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.221). [R] will be
displayed on the LCD panel. Set the release mode switch to <2>,
then press the transmit button. If the switch is set to <o> (immediate
shooting), the [V btn function] setting will be applied.
ISO Speed Menu During Movie Shooting
When the Live View shooting/Movie shooting
switch is set to <k>, the corresponding setting
in [z2: ISO speed settings] will change to
[Range for movies].
332
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
You can shoot a series of short movie clips lasting approx. 2 sec., 4
sec., or 8 sec. called video snapshots. The video snapshots can be
joined together into a single movie called a video snapshot album. You
can thereby show quick highlights of a trip or event.
A video snapshot album can also be played back together with
background music (p.340, 372).
Video Snapshot Album Concept
Video
snapshot 1
Video
snapshot 2
Video
snapshot **
Video snapshot album
Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration
the Mode Dial to a mode other
1 Set
than <v>.
[Video snapshot].
2 Select
 Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in
Basic Zone modes), select [Video
snapshot] and press <0>.
3 Select [Enable].
333
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
4 Select [Album settings].
5 Select [Create a new album].
the snapshot length.
6 Select
 Press <0> and use the <W> <X>
keys to select the snapshot’s length,
then press <0>.
[OK].
7 Select
 Press the <M> button to exit the
Shooting duration
334
menu.
 A blue bar will appear to indicate the
snapshot length.
 Go to “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.335).
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Creating a Video Snapshot Album
the first video snapshot.
8 Shoot
 Press the <0> button, then shoot.
 The blue bar indicating the shooting
duration will gradually decrease. After
the set shooting duration elapses, the
shooting stops automatically.
 The confirmation screen will appear
(p.336-337).
as a video snapshot album.
9 Save
 Select [J Save as album], then
press <0>.
 The movie clip will be saved as the
video snapshot album’s first video
snapshot.
to shoot more video
10 Continue
snapshots.
 Repeat step 8 to shoot the next video
snapshot.
 Select [J Add to album], then press
<0>.
 To create another video snapshot
album, select [W Save as a new
album].
 Repeat step 10 as necessary.
the video snapshot shooting.
11 Exit
 Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable].
To return to normal movie
shooting, be sure to set [Disable].
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu, and return to the normal movie
shooting.
335
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Options in Steps 9 and 10
Function
Description
J Save as album (Step 9)
The movie clip will be saved as the video
snapshot album’s first video snapshot.
J Add to album (Step 10)
The video snapshot just recorded will be
added to the album recorded immediately
before.
W Save as a new album
(Step 10)
A new video snapshot album is created and
the movie clip is saved as the first video
snapshot. The new album will be a different
file from the previously recorded album.
1 Playback video snapshot
(Step 9 and 10)
The video snapshot just recorded will be
played back. For playback operations, see the
table on the next page.
r Do not save to album
(Step 9)
r Delete without saving to
album (Step 10)
The video snapshot just recorded will be
erased instead of being saved to the album.
Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
If you want to shoot another video snapshot
right after shooting one video snapshot, set
[Show confirm msg] to [Disable]. This
setting will allow you to immediately shoot the
next video snapshot without the confirmation
screen appearing after you shoot each time.
336
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
[Playback video snapshot] Operations in Steps 9 and 10
Function
Playback Description
7 Play
By pressing <0>, you can play back or pause the video
snapshot recorded immediately before.
5 First frame
Displays the first scene of the album’s first video snapshot.
P Skip backward*
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips back
by a few seconds.
3 Previous frame
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the
movie.
O Skip forward*
Each time you press <0>, the video snapshot skips
forward by a few seconds.
4 Last frame
Displays the last scene of the album’s last video snapshot.
Playback position
mm' ss"
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
9 Volume
Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in
speaker (p.365).
32
Pressing the <M> button returns to the previous
screen.
* With [Skip backward] and [Skip forward], the skipping length corresponds to
the number of seconds set under [Video snapshot] (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8
sec.).
337
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Adding to an Existing Album
1
Select [Add to existing album].
 Follow step 5 on page 334 to select
[Add to existing album], then press
<0>.
an existing album.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an
existing album, then press <0>.
 Select [OK], then press <0>.
 Certain video snapshot settings will
change to match the existing album’s
settings.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
 The video snapshot shooting screen
will appear.
the video snapshot.
3 Shoot
 See “Creating a Video Snapshot
Album” (p.335) to shoot the video
snapshot.
You cannot select an album shot with another camera.
338
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots
 When the MOV format is selected, video snapshot cannot be set.
 You can add to an album only video snapshots with the same duration
(approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each).
 Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a
new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
• Changing the [Movie rec. size].
• Changing the [Sound rec.] setting from [Auto]/[Manual] to [Disable]
or from [Disable] to [Auto]/[Manual].
• Updating the firmware.
 The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate.
Depending on the frame rate, the shooting duration displayed during
playback may not be exact.
339
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Playing back an Album
You can play back a video snapshot album in the same way as a normal
movie (p.365).
1
Play back the movie.
 Press the <x> button to display an
image.
the album.
2 Select
 In the single-image display, the
[st] icon displayed on the upper
left of the screen indicates a video
snapshot album.
 Turn the <5> dial to select an
album.
back the album.
3 Play
 Press <0>.
 On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [7] (Play), then
press <0>.
Background Music
 You can play background music when you play back albums, normal
movies, and slide shows on the camera (p.366, 372). To play
background music, you must first copy the background music to the card
using EOS Utility (EOS software). For information on how to copy the
background music, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
 Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private
enjoyment. Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder.
340
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
Editing an Album
After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video
snapshots in the album.
1
Select [X].
 On the movie playback panel
displayed, select [X] (Edit), then
press <0>.
 The editing screen will be displayed.
an editing operation.
2 Select
 Select an editing option, then press
<0>.
Function
Description
T Move snapshot
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot
you want to move, then press <0>. Press the <Y>
<Z> keys to move the snapshot, then press <0>.
L Delete snapshot
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot
you want to delete, then press <0>. The [L] icon will
be displayed on the selected video snapshot. Pressing
<0> again will cancel the selection and [L] will
disappear.
7 Play snapshot
Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the video snapshot
you want to play, then press <0>.
341
3 Shooting Video Snapshots
the edited album.
3 Save
 Press the <M> button to return to
the Editing panel at the screen’s
bottom.
 Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new album, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original album, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, editing albums is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
342
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie
shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will
appear.
 The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
 Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause
the <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always turn
off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
shooting time depending on the shooting conditions. If you use a tripod
or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommended to set the
IS switch to <2>.
 The camera’s built-in microphones will also pick up the operation sound
during shooting and mechanical sound of the camera. Use the
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to reduce these
sounds in the movie.
 Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
 If the brightness changes during autoexposure movie shooting, the
movie may freeze temporarily. In such a case, shoot movies with manual
exposure.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost
exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may
deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support
MOV/MP4 format).
343
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
 If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie
shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer
memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will
climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting
Indicator
will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either
not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.
First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
Playback and TV Connection
 If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.373) and shoot a movie, the TV
set will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the sound
will be properly recorded.
Restrictions on MP4-format Movies
Note that generally the following restrictions apply to MP4-format movies.
 Sound will not be recorded on approx. the last two frames.
 When you play back movies on Windows, images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
344
9
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to play back and erase
photos and movies, how to display them on a TV
screen, and other playback-related functions.
Images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their
file names changed.
345
x Image Playback
Single-Image Display
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button.
 The last image captured or played
back will appear.
an image.
2 Select
 To play back images starting with the
last image captured, turn the <5>
dial counterclockwise. To play back
images starting with the first captured
image, turn the dial clockwise.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the information display will
change.
No information
Basic information
display
Shooting information display
346
x Image Playback
the image playback.
3 Exit
 Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to
shooting-ready state.
Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed (p.346), you can press
the <W> <X> keys to change the shooting information displayed at the
screen’s bottom as follows. For details, see pages 349-350.
Detailed information
Lens aberration correction information
Lens / Histogram information
Color space / Noise reduction information
White balance information
Picture Style information 2
Picture Style information 1
3 Grid Display
In single-image display, you can overlay
the grid on the image playback.
With [33: Playback grid], you can
select [3x3 l], [6x4 m], or [3x3+diag
n].
This function is convenient for checking
the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt as
well as composition.
The grid is not displayed during movie playback.
347
B: Shooting Information Display
The information displayed varies depending on the shooting mode and
settings.
Sample Information for Still Photos
 Basic information display
Wi-Fi function
Wireless signal strength/
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Battery level
Eye-Fi transfer completed
Rating
Protect images
Playback number/
Total images recorded
Folder number File number
Shutter speed
Aperture
Exposure compensation
amount
Image-recording
quality
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
 If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information
may not be displayed.
 It may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on
other cameras.
348
B: Shooting Information Display
 Shooting information display
• Detailed information
Exposure compensation amount
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
Shooting date and time
Aperture
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Shooting mode
Scroll bar
Highlight tone priority
Metering mode
White balance
File size
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance correction
Flash exposure compensation
amount / Multi Shot Noise
Reduction
Image-recording quality
Picture Style/Settings
AF Microadjustment
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be
displayed.
* For images shot with flash and without exposure compensation, <0> will be
displayed.
* <w> and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images
shot with HDR shooting.
* <P> will be displayed for images shot with multiple-exposure shooting.
* <M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* <G> will be displayed for still photos taken as test shots for time-lapse movies.
* <u> will be displayed for images shot with the Creative filter function and for
images that are processed (RAW image processing performed, resized, or
Creative filter applied) and then saved.
* For cropped images, <u> and <N> will be displayed.
349
B: Shooting Information Display
• Lens/Histogram information
Histogram display
(Brightness)
Lens name
Focal length
Histogram display
(RGB)
• White balance information
• Picture Style information 1
• Picture Style information 2
• Color space / Noise
reduction information
• Lens aberration correction
information
If you used GPS Receiver GP-E2 to record GPS information for the image,
the “GPS information” screen will also appear.
350
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Movie Information Display
Playback
Aperture
Shutter speed
Movie shooting mode/
Time-lapse movie
Creative filters
Recording format
Movie recording size
Frame rate
Movie file size
Shooting time, Playback time
Compression method
* If manual exposure is used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed (when
set manually) will be displayed.
* The <t> icon will be displayed for video snapshots.
* The <t> icon will be displayed for HDR movies.
During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and
[Threshold] of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].
 Highlight Alert
When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed,
clipped highlights will blink. To obtain more image detail in the
overexposed, blinking areas, set the exposure compensation to a
negative amount and shoot again.
351
B: Shooting Information Display
 AF Point Display
When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that has
achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point selection
is set, multiple AF points may be displayed at the same time.
 Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33:
Histogram disp].
[Brightness] Display
Sample Histograms
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution
of the image’s brightness level. The horizontal
axis indicates the brightness level (darker on the
Dark image
left and brighter on the right), while the vertical
axis indicates how many pixels exist for each
brightness level. The more pixels there are
toward the left, the darker the image. The more
Normal brightness
pixels there are toward the right, the brighter the
image. If there are too many pixels on the left, the
shadow detail will be lost. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be lost.
Bright image
The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By
checking the image and its brightness histogram,
you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on
the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how
many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels
there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The
more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the
color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective color
information will be lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right,
the color will be too saturated with no gradation. By checking the
image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and
gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.
352
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Displaying Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or
100 images on one screen.
1


Switch to the index display.
 During image playback, press the
<I> button.
 The 4-image index display will
appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame.
 Pressing the <I> button will
switch the display as follows: 9
images 9 36 images 9 100 images.
Pressing the <u> button will switch
the display as follows: 100 images 9
36 images 9 9 images 9 4 images
9 1 image.


an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to move the
orange frame and select the image.
You can also press the <W> <X> or
<Y> <Z> keys to select the image.
 Turning the <6> dial will display
image(s) on the next or previous
screen.
 Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image in the
single-image display.
353
x Searching for Images Quickly
I
Jumping through Images (Jump Display)
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1
Select [Image jump w/6].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
the jump method.
2 Select
 Select the jump method, then press
<0>.
d: Display images one by one
e: Jump 10 images
f: Jump 100 images
g: Display by date
h: Display by folder
i: Display movies only
j: Display stills only
k: Display by image rating (p.359)
Turn the <6> dial to select.
by jumping.
3 Browse
 Press the <x> button to play back
Jump method
images.
 In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
 You can browse images with the
method that was set.
Playback position
 To search images by shooting date, select [Date].
 To search images by folder, select [Folder].
 If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display only one or the other.
 If no images match the selected [Rating], you cannot browse through the
images with the <6> dial.
354
u/y Magnified View
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD
monitor.
1
Magnify the image.
 Press the <u> button during image
playback.
 The image will be magnified.
 If you hold down the <u> button, the
image will be magnified until it
reaches the maximum magnification.
 Press the <I> button to reduce
the magnification. If you hold down
the button, the magnification will be
reduced to the single-image display.
Magnified area position
around the image.
2 Scroll
 Use <9> to scroll around the
magnified image.
 To exit magnified view, press the
<x> button and the single-image
display will reappear.
 Turn the <5> dial to view another image while the magnification is
maintained.
 Magnified view is not possible during the image review immediately after
the image is taken.
 A movie cannot be magnified.
355
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your
fingers for various playback operations. First, press the <x> button
to play back images.
Browsing Images
Swipe with one finger.
 With single-image display, touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You
can browse to the next or previous
image by swiping your finger to the
left or right.
Swipe to the left to see the next
(newer) image, or swipe to the right to
see the previous (older) image.
 With index display, also touch the
LCD monitor with one finger. You
can browse to the next or previous
screen by swiping your finger up or
down.
Swipe up to see the next (newer)
images or swipe down to see the
previous (older) images.
When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap on the
image again to display it as a single
image.
Jumping through Images (Jump Display)
Swipe with two fingers.
Touch the LCD monitor with two fingers.
When you swipe two fingers to the left
or right, you can jump through images
with the method set in [Image jump w/
6] under the [x2] tab.
356
d Playing Back with the Touch Screen
Reducing Image (Index Display)
Pinch two fingers.
Touch the screen with two fingers spread
apart, and pinch your fingers together on
the screen.
 Each time you pinch your fingers, the
single-image display will change to
the index display. If you spread your
fingers, the image display will change
in the reverse order.
 When you select an image, the
orange frame will appear. Tap on the
image again to display it as a single
image.
Magnifying Image
Spread two fingers apart.
Touch the screen with two fingers
together, then spread your fingers apart
on the screen.
 As you spread your fingers, the
image will be magnified.
 The image can be magnified up to
approx. 10x.
 You can scroll around the image by
dragging your fingers.
 To reduce the image, pinch your
fingers together on the screen.
 Tapping on the [2] icon will return to
the single-image display.
Touch screen operations on the camera’s LCD monitor are also possible
while playing back images on a TV set connected to your camera (p.373).
357
b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1
Select [Rotate image].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rotated.
 You can also select an image in the
index display (p.353).
the image.
3 Rotate
 Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° 9 270° 9 0°.
 To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
 If you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.387) before taking vertical
shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
 If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
 A movie cannot be rotated.
358
3 Setting Ratings
You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of five rating
marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.
1
Select [Rating].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an image
or movie to be rated, then press
<0>.
 By pressing the <I> button, you
can select images from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, press the <u> button.
the rating.
3 Set
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
rating.
 When you select a rating for the
image, the number beside the set
rating will increase by one.
 To rate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
359
3 Setting Ratings
A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are
more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed.
Taking Advantage of Ratings
 With [32: Image jump w/6], you can display only images having the
specified rating.
 With [32: Slide show], you can play back only images having the
specified rating.
 Depending on the computer OS, you can see each file’s rating as part of
the file information display or in the provided image viewer (JPEG
images only).
360
Q Quick Control for Playback
During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following:
[J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [R: RAW
image processing], [U: Creative filters], [S: Resize (JPEG images
only)], [N: Cropping (JPEG images only)], [1: Highlight alert], [T:
AF point display], [e: Image jump w/6], and [q: Send images to
smartphone*].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
* Not selectable if [Wi-Fi/NFC] under [51: Wireless communication settings] is
set to [Disable].
1
Press the <Q> button.
 During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
 The Quick Control options will
appear.
a function and set it.
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select a
function.
 The current setting of the selected
function is displayed at the bottom of
the screen.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to change
the setting.
 When setting the RAW image
processing (p.390), Creative filters
(p.399), Resize (p.395), Cropping
(p.397), or Send images to
smartphone, also press <0> to
finalize the setting.
 Image jump w/6: Set the Rating
(p.354) by pressing the <B>
button.
 To cancel, press the <M> button.
361
Q Quick Control for Playback
the setting.
3 Exit
 Press the <Q> button to exit the
Quick Control screen.
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]
is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to
the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
 Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
 For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may
be restricted.
362
k Enjoying Movies
You can play back movies in the following three ways:
Playback on a TV Set (p.373)
By connecting the camera to a TV set
with HDMI Cable HTC-100, you can play
back the camera’s movies and still
photos on the TV set.
 Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
 Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB
cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor (p.365-372)
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
play back the still photos and movies on
the card in an automatic slide show.
A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played
back with the camera.
363
k Enjoying Movies
Playback and Editing with a Computer
The movie files recorded on the card can
be transferred to a computer and played
back or edited with pre-installed or
general-purpose software compatible
with the movie’s recording format.
To play back or edit a movie with commercially-available software, use
software compatible with MOV-format and MP4-format movies. For details
on commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.
364
k Playing Back Movies
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button to display an
image.
a movie.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
movie to be played back.
 In the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the upper
left of the screen indicates a movie. If
the movie is a video snapshot,
<st> will be displayed.
 In the index display, perforations at
the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
back from the index display, press
<0> to switch to the single-image
display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<0>.
 The movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
back the movie.
4 Play
 Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.
Speaker
 The movie will start playing back.
 Press <0> during playback to
pause. Press again to resume.
 You can adjust the sound volume by
turning the <6> dial even during
movie playback.
 For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.
 Before listening to a movie’s sound through headphones, turn down the
volume to prevent hurting your ears.
 The camera may not be able to play back movies shot with another camera.
365
k Playing Back Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Operation
Playback Description
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <Y> <Z>
keys. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper
right of the screen.
5 First frame
Displays the movie’s first frame.
3 Previous frame
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the
movie.
4 Last frame
Displays the movie’s last frame.
v Background
music*
Plays back a movie with the selected background music
(p.372).
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (p.367).
Playback position
mm' ss"
Playback time (minutes:seconds)
9 Volume
Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in
speaker (p.365).
32
Press the <M> button to return to the single-image
display.
* When background music is set, the movie sound will not be played back.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the continuous playback time
at room temperature (23°C / 73°F) is approx. 3 hr. 40 min.
 By connecting commercially-available headphones equipped with a 3.5
mm diameter stereo mini plug to the camera’s headphone terminal
(p.26), you can listen to the movie’s sound (p.313).
 If you connect the camera to a TV set to play back a movie (p.373),
adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not
change the sound volume.) If there is audio feedback, place the camera
farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV sound volume.
366
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
Playback with the Touch Screen
Tap [7] on the center of the
screen.
 The movie will start playing back.
 To display the movie playback panel,
tap <s1> on the upper left of the
screen.
 To pause the movie while it is playing
back, tap on the screen. The movie
playback panel will also appear.
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
1
On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
 The movie editing panel will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
the part to be edited out.
2 Specify
 Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to see the
previous or next frames. Holding
down the key will fast forward or fast
rewind the frames. Turn the <5> dial
for frame-by-frame playback.
 After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in white on the top is what will remain.
367
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the edited movie.
3 Check
 Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
 To change the editing, go back to step
2.
 To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation dialog.
the edited movie.
4 Save
 Select [W], then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK], then press <0> to save the
edited movie and return to the movie
playback screen.
 Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [Z] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the
movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.
 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
 Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
368
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1
Number of images
to be played back
Select [Slide show].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
the images to be played
2 Select
back.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the desired option, then press <0>.
All images/Movies/Stills
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
one of the following: [jAll images]
[kMovies] [zStills]. Then press
<0>.
Date/Folder/Rating
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
one of the following: [iDate]
[nFolder] [9Rating].
 When <zH> is highlighted,
press the <B> button.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select an
option, then press <0>.
[Date]
[Folder]
[Rating]
369
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Item
Playback Description
jAll images
All the still photos and movies on the card will be played
back.
iDate
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date
will be played back.
nFolder
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played
back.
kMovies
Only the movies on the card will be played back.
zStills
Only the still photos on the card will be played back.
9Rating
Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
be played back.
[Set up] as desired.
3 Configure
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
[Set up], then press <0>.
 Set the [Display time], [Repeat]
(repeated playback), [Transition
effect] (effect when changing
images), and [Background music]
for the still photos.
 The background music selection
procedure is explained on page 372.
 After selecting the settings, press the
<M> button.
[Display time]
370
[Repeat]
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
[Transition effect]
[Background music]
the slide show.
4 Start
 Press the <W><X> keys to select
[Start], then press <0>.
 After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
the slide show.
5 Exit
 To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the
<M> button.
 To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show.
 During auto playback of still photos, you can press the <B> button to
change the display format (p.346).
 During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
 During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view
another image.
 During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
 The display time may vary depending on the image.
 To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 373.
371
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Selecting the Background Music
After you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to copy background music to
the card, you can play background music together with the slide show.
1
Select [Background music].
 Set [Background music] to [On],
then press <0>.
 If the card has no background music,
you cannot perform step 2.
the background music.
2 Select
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the desired background music, then
press <0>. You can also select
multiple background music tracks.
the background music.
3 Play
 To listen to a sample of the
background music, press the
<B> button.
 Press the <W> <X> keys to play
another background music track. To
stop listening to the background
music, press the <B> button
again.
 Adjust the sound volume by turning
the <6> dial.
 To delete a background music track,
press the <W> <X> keys and select
the track, then press the <L> button.
At the time of purchase, the camera does not have background music. The
procedure to copy background music to a card is explained in the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
372
Viewing Images on a TV Set
By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable, you can play
the camera’s still photos and movies on the TV set. For the HDMI cable,
HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended.
If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video
system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your TV set).
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
 With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
the HDMI cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
set’s HDMI IN port.
on the TV set and switch the
3 Turn
TV set’s video input to select the
connected port.
the camera’s power switch to
4 Set
<1>.
the <x> button.
5 Press
 The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
 The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
of the TV set.
 By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the display format.
 To play back movies, see page 365.
373
Viewing Images on a TV Set
 Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot
be adjusted with the camera.
 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
 Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
 Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
 Certain TV sets may not be able to display the captured movies.
Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
1
Select [Ctrl over HDMI].
 Under the [33] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
2 Select [Enable].
the camera to a TV set.
3 Connect
 Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV set.
 The TV set’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera. If it does not
switch automatically, use the TV set’s
remote control to select the HDMI IN
port the cable is connected to.
the camera’s <x> button.
4 Press
 An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV set’s
remote control to play back images.
374
Viewing Images on a TV Set
an image.
5 Select
 Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
Still photo playback
menu
the remote control’s Enter
6 Press
button.
 The menu appears and you can
perform the playback operations
Movie playback menu
shown on the left.
 Press the / button to select the
desired option, then press the Enter
2
: Return
button. For a slide show, press the
a : 9-image index
remote control’s / button to select
1
: Play movie
an option, then press the Enter
y : Slide show
button.
B : Display shooting info
 If you select [Return] and press the
b
: Rotate
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the / button to
select an image.
 Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.
 Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable],
and use the camera to control the playback operation.
375
K Protecting Images
You can set protections to prevent the precious images from being
erased accidentally.
3 Protecting a Single Image
1
Select [Protect images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
 An image will be displayed.
Image protect icon
the image.
3 Protect
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected, then press
<0>.
 The image will be protected, and the
<K> icon will appear at the top of
the screen.
 To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
 To protect another image, repeat step
3.
376
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [31:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
If you format the card (p.64), the protected images will also be erased.
 Movies can also be protected.
 Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
 If you erase all the images (p.379), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
377
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.376) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no
longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images
from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing an image shot in
RAW+JPEG will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.
Erasing a Single Image
1 Play back the image to be erased.
the <L> button.
2 Press
 The Erase menu will appear.
the image.
3 Erase
 Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
image displayed will be erased.
3 Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By adding checkmarks [X] to the images to be erased, you can erase
multiple images at once.
1
378
Select [Erase images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
L Erasing Images
[Select and erase images].
2 Select
 Select [Select and erase images],
then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.
the images to be erased.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be erased, then press
<0>.
 A checkmark [X] will be displayed on
the upper left of the screen.
 By pressing the <I> button, you
can select images from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, press the <u> button.
 To select another image to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the image.
4 Erase
 Press the <L> button and select
[OK].
 The selected images will be erased at
once.
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When
[31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
To erase all images including protected images, format the card (p.64).
379
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded
on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image
selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one
batch or give the print order to a photofinisher.
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.
The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They
cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Options
1
Select [Print order].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
2 Select [Set up].
the option as desired.
3 Set
 Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
 Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
380
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
[Print type]
Print type
Date
File number
[Date]
[File No.]
K Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
L Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.
K
Both
L
Prints both the standard and index prints.
On
Off
On
Off
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
[On] imprints the file number on the print.
the setting.
4 ExitPress
the <M> button.
 The print order screen will reappear.
 Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] to order the images to be
printed.
381
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
 RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered.
 Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.
 With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
 When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications
have been set. It cannot be printed with the specified print order if you
just extract images from the card and try to print them.
 Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
 Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a
different camera and then try to specify a print order. All the print orders
may be overwritten inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be
possible, depending on the image type.
You can send images to a wireless compatible printer supporting PictBridge
(Wireless LAN) and print them. For details, refer to the Wireless Function
Instruction Manual.
382
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print Ordering
 Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
By pressing the <I> button, you can
select images from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, press the <u> button.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
Quantity
Total images selected
Checkmark
Index icon
[Standard] [Both]
Press the <W> <X> keys to set the
number of copies to be printed for the
displayed image.
[Index]
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box [X]. The image will be included in
the index print.
 Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be specified. If you select
[Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for that
folder will all be canceled.
 All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on the card.
 Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set [Byn] or [All image].
 When using a printer supporting PictBridge, print no more than 400
images for one print order. If you specify more than this, all the images
may not be printed.
383
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When
you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer,
the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function
is useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1
Select [Photobook Set-up].
 Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook Set-up], then press
<0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
 An image will be displayed.
 To display the three-image display,
press the <I> button. To return to
the single-image display, press the
<u> button.
the image to be specified.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be specified, then press
<0>.
 Repeat this step to select another
image. The number of images that
have been specified will be displayed
on the upper left of the screen.
 To cancel the image specification,
press <0> again.
384
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set
to [All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be specified.
To cancel the image specification, select
[Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on
card].
 RAW images and movies cannot be specified.
 Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another
camera for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings
may be overwritten.
385
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to
view.
1
Select [LCD brightness].
 Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>.
the brightness.
2 Adjust
While referring to the gray chart,
press the <Y> <Z> keys, then press
<0>.
To check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram is recommended
(p.352).
386
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD
monitor and on the computer instead of
horizontally. You can change the setting for this
feature.
1
Select [Auto rotate].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Auto
rotate], then press <0>.
the image rotation.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 OnzD
The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both
the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
 OnD
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.
 Off
The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation
was [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.
 Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be
automatically rotated for the image review.
 If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the
image may not be rotated automatically for playback.
 If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen,
it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image. Using
the EOS software is recommended.
387
MEMO
388
10
Post-Processing
Images
You can process RAW images, resize or crop JPEG
images, and apply a Creative filter.
 The O icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that
the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (d/
s/f/a/F).
 The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
 Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be
performed if the camera is set for multiple exposures or when
it is connected to a computer via an interface cable.
389
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG
images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply
different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images
from it.
Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the
camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.512) to
process those images.
1
Select [RAW image processing].
 Under the [31] tab, select [RAW
image processing], then press
<0>.
 1 images will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to process.
 By pressing the <I> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
the image.
3 Process
 Press <0> to make the RAW
processing options appear in a while
(p.392).
 Press the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys
to select an option, then turn the
<5> dial to change the setting.
 The displayed image will reflect such
settings as “Brightness adjustment”,
“White balance”, etc.
 To return to the image settings at the
time of shooting, press the <B>
button.
390
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Displaying the setting screen
 Press <0> to display the setting
screen. Turn the <5> or <6> dial
to change the setting. Press <0> to
finalize the setting and return to the
screen in step 3.
the image.
4 Save
 Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
 Select [OK] to save the image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To process another image, repeat
steps 2 to 4.
Magnified View
You can magnify the image by pressing the <u> button in step 3. The
magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of [Image quality]
set in [RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the
magnified image.
To cancel magnified view, press the <I> button.
Images with Aspect Ratio Setting
Frame lines indicating the shooting area will be displayed on images
shot with the aspect ratio (p.146) set to [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1]. JPEG
images generated from RAW images will be saved with the set aspect
ratio.
391
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
RAW Image Processing Options
 P Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop
increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.
 Q White balance (p.162)
You can select the white balance. If you select [Q] and press the
<B> button, you can select [Auto: Ambience priority] or [Auto:
White priority]. If you select [P] and press the <B> button, you
can set the color temperature. The displayed image will reflect the
setting’s effect.
 R Picture Style (p.154)
You can select the Picture Style. By pressing the <B> button,
you can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other parameters. The
displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.
 S Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.169)
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will
reflect the setting’s effect.
 T High ISO speed noise reduction (p.170)
You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.391).
 73 Image quality (p.142)
You can set the image quality when generating an image in JPEG
format.
392
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
 U Color space (p.181)
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD
monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the
image will hardly be perceptible when either color space is set.
 V Peripheral illumination correction (p.175)
A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the
lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.391) and check the four corners. The
peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will be less
pronounced than that applied with the Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software) at maximum correction amount. If the effects of
correction are not apparent, use Digital Photo Professional to apply
the peripheral illumination correction.
 W Distortion correction
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If
[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image
periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the
sharpness with the Picture Style’s [Sharpness] parameter setting as
necessary.
 X Chromatic aberration correction (p.176)
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline) due
to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.391).
393
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Peripheral Illumination Correction, Distortion Correction, and
Chromatic Aberration Correction
To perform peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, and
chromatic aberration correction, the correction data of the lens used is
necessary. If you cannot apply correction when processing RAW images in
the camera, use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.512) to register the correction
data to the camera.
 Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the
same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional.
 When processing images with [Distortion correction] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.352) or Dust Delete Data (p.405) will not
be appended to the image.
394
S Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it
as a new image. Resizing an image is possible with JPEG 3/4/a/b
images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.
1
Select [Resize].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to resize.
 By pressing the <I> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
the desired image size.
3 Select
 Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
 Select the desired image size, then
press <0>.
Target sizes
the image.
4 Save
 Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
395
S Resizing JPEG Images
Resize Options by Original Image Size
Original Image Size
3
Available Resize Settings
4
a
b
c
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
4
a
k
b
Image Sizes
The image sizes by aspect ratios are shown in the table below.
Image
Quality
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
4
3552x2664
3984x2240*
2656x2656
3984x2656
(10.6 megapixels) (9.5 megapixels) (8.9 megapixels) (7.1 megapixels)
a
2976x1984
2656x1992
2976x1680*
1984x1984
(5.9 megapixels) (5.3 megapixels) (5.0 megapixels) (3.9 megapixels)
b
1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
c
720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
(0.35 megapixels) (0.31 megapixels) (0.29 megapixels) (0.23 megapixels)
The items marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the indicated aspect
ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.
396
N Cropping JPEG Images
You can crop a JPEG image and save it as another image. JPEG c
and RAW images cannot be cropped. JPEG images shot with
RAW+JPEG can be cropped.
1
Select [Cropping].
 Under the [x2] tab, select
[Cropping], then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to crop.
 By pressing the <I> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
the cropping frame size,
3 Set
aspect ratio, position, and
orientation.
 Press <0> to display the cropping
frame.
 The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
 Press the <u> or <I> button.
 The cropping frame size will change. The smaller the cropping
frame, the larger the image magnification will be.
Changing the Aspect Ratio
 Turn the <5> dial.
 Cropping frame aspect ratio will change to [3:2], [16:9], [4:3], or
[1:1].
397
N Cropping JPEG Images
Moving the Cropping Frame
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys.
 The cropping frame will move up, down, left, or right.
 You can also touch the frame and drag it to the desired position.
Switching the Orientations of the Cropping Frame
 Press the <B> button.
 The cropping frame will switch between the vertical and horizontal
orientations. This also enables you to crop a horizontally shot image
to look as if it was shot in vertical orientation.
the image area to be
4 Check
cropped.
 Press the <Q> button.
 The image area to be cropped will be
displayed.
 To return to the original display, press
the <Q> button again.
the image.
5 Save
 Press <0> and select [OK] to save
the cropped image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To crop another image, repeat steps 2
to 5.
 Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again. In addition,
you cannot resize it or apply a Creative filter.
 AF point display information (p.352) and Dust Delete Data (p.405) will
not be appended to the cropped images.
When [x3: Playback grid] is set (p.347), you can keep the grid displayed
while setting the cropping.
398
U Applying Creative Filters
You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a
new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, and Miniature effect.
1
Select [Creative filters].
 Under the [x1] tab, select [Creative
filters], then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to apply a filter to.
 By pressing the <Hy> button, you
can switch to the index display and
select an image.
a filter.
3 Select
 When you press <0>, the types of
Creative filters will be displayed
(p.400).
 Select a filter, then press <0>.
 The image will be displayed with the
effects of the filter applied.
the filter effect.
4 Adjust
 Adjust the filter effect, then press
<0>.
 For the Miniature effect, press the
<W> <X> keys to move the white
frame to where you want the image to
look sharp, then press <0>.
399
U Applying Creative Filters
the image.
5 Save
 Select [OK] to save the image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To apply a filter to another image,
repeat steps 2 to 5.
 When shooting 1+JPEG images, the Creative filter will be applied to
the 1 image and the image will be saved as a JPEG image.
 When shooting 41+JPEG or 61+JPEG images, the Creative filter
will be applied to the JPEG image.
 If an aspect ratio was set for a 1 image and the filter effect is applied
to it, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that is set.
 Dust Delete Data (p.405) will not be appended to images with Fish-eye
effect applied.
Creative Filter Characteristics
 G Grainy B/W
Creates a grainy black-and-white photo. You can change the blackand-white effect by adjusting the contrast.
 W Soft focus
Gives the image a soft look. You can change the degree of softness
by adjusting the blur.
400
U Applying Creative Filters
 X Fish-eye effect
Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type
distortion.
Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along
the periphery of the image changes. Also, since this filter effect will
magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may
degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. Set the filter
effect in step 4 while checking the resulting image.
 Y Art bold effect
Makes the photo look like an oil painting and the subject look more
three-dimensional. You can adjust the contrast and saturation. Note
that subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered
with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or noise will become
more noticeable.
 Z Water painting effect
Makes the photo look like a watercolor painting with soft colors. You
can control the color density by adjusting the filter effect. Note that
some scenes including night scenes or low-light scenes may not be
rendered with a smooth gradation and may look irregular or noise
will become more noticeable.
 H Toy camera effect
Darkens the photo’s corners and applies a unique color tone that
makes it look as if it was shot by a toy camera. You can change the
color cast by adjusting the color tone.
 c Miniature effect
Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks
sharp. In step 4, if you press the <B> button (or tap on [T] at
the screen’s bottom), you can switch between the white frame’s
vertical and horizontal orientations.
401
MEMO
402
11
Sensor Cleaning
The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to
automatically shake off dust adhered to the image
sensor’s front layer (low pass filter).
The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the
image so that the dust spots remaining can be deleted
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, p.512).
Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases
lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of
the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor
cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can
press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start
shooting immediately.
403
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit is activated to automatically shake off the dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning
manually, or disable it.
Cleaning the Sensor Now
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean nowf].
2 Select
 Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
 Select [OK].
 The screen will indicate that the
sensor is being cleaned. (A small
sound may be heard.) Although there
will be a shutter release sound during
the cleaning, no picture is taken.
 For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
 Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option remains disabled temporarily.
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
 The sensor cleaning will no longer be performed when you set the
power switch to <1> or <2>.
404
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
Photo Professional (EOS software, p.512) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Preparation
 Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
 Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
 Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to
infinity (u). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to
face toward you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
1
Select [Dust Delete Data].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 After the automatic self-cleaning of
the sensor is performed, a message
will appear. Although there will be a
shutter release sound, during the
cleaning, no picture is taken.
405
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
a solid-white object.
3 Shoot
 At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.




- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
The picture will be taken in aperturepriority AE mode at an aperture of
f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
If the data is not obtained
successfully, an error message will
appear. Follow the “Preparation”
procedure on the preceding page,
then select [OK]. Take the picture
again.
Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended to update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software,
p.512) to erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software).
406
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before
cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be
cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
2 Select [Clean manually].
[OK].
3 Select
 In a moment, the reflex mirror will
lockup and the shutter will open.
 “CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.
4 Clean the sensor.
the cleaning.
5 End
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately) with AA/R6 batteries,
manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.
For the power source, using DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and AC
Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) is recommended.
407
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
 When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, [Clean manually] cannot be
selected.
 While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
 The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
 Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush may scratch the
sensor.
 Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
 Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air
may damage the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
 If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
 If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
408
12
Customizing the
Camera
You can make fine adjustments to various camera
functions to suit your picture-taking preferences with
Custom Functions.
Also, current camera settings can be saved under <w>
<x> positions of the Mode Dial.
The functions explained in this chapter can be set and
work only in the Creative Zone modes.
Crea
ti v
e
n
Zo
e
409
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
1 Select [8].
the group.
2 Select
 Select C.Fn I, II, or III, then press
<0>.
Custom Function number
the Custom Function
3 Select
number.
 Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select
the Custom Function number, then
press <0>.
the setting as desired.
4 Change
 Press the <W> <X> keys to select
the desired setting (number), then
press <0>.
 Repeat steps 2 to 4 if you want to set
other Custom Functions.
 At the bottom of the screen, the
current Custom Function settings are
indicated below the respective
function numbers.
the setting.
5 Exit
 Press the <M> button.
 The screen for step 2 will reappear.
Clearing All Custom Functions
In step 2, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to clear all the
Custom Function settings.
Even if you clear all the Custom Function settings, the [8C.Fn III -4:
Custom Controls] settings will be retained.
410
3 Custom FunctionsN
A LV
Shooting
C.Fn I: Exposure
k Movie
Shooting
1
Exposure level increments
p.413
k
k
2
ISO speed setting increments
p.413
k
In a
3
Bracketing auto cancel
p.413
k
4
Bracketing sequence
p.414
k
5
Number of bracketed shots
p.414
k
6
Safety shift
p.415
k
A LV
Shooting
C.Fn II: Autofocus
1
Tracking sensitivity
p.416
2
Acceleration/deceleration tracking
p.417
3
AF point auto switching
p.417
4
AI Servo 1st image priority
p.418
5
AI Servo 2nd image priority
p.418
6
AF-assist beam firing
p.419
7
Lens drive when AF impossible
p.419
8
Select AF area selection mode
p.420
9
AF area selection method
p.420
10 Orientation linked AF point
p.421
11 Initial AF point, o AI Servo AF
p.422
k Movie
Shooting
k*
12 Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking p.422
13 AF point selection movement
p.423
14 AF point display during focus
p.423
15 Viewfinder display illumination
p.424
16 AF Microadjustment
p.424
* When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used.
Shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV) shooting or
movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)
411
3 Custom FunctionsN
C.Fn III: Operation/Others
A LV
Shooting
k Movie
Shooting
1
Warnings z in viewfinder
p.425
2
Dial direction during Tv/Av
p.425
k
k
3
Retract lens on power off
p.426
k
k
4
Custom Controls
p.426
412
Depends on setting
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn I -1
Exposure level increments
0: 1/3-stop
1: 1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is
effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine
increments than 1/3-stop increments.
When [1: 1/2-stop] is set, the exposure level will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel as shown below.
C.Fn I -2
ISO speed setting increments
0: 1/3-stop
You can set the ISO speed manually in 1/3-stop increments.
1: 1-stop
You can set the ISO speed manually in 1-stop increments.
Even if [1: 1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop
increments when ISO Auto is set.
C.Fn I -3
Bracketing auto cancel
0: On
When you set the power switch to <2>, the AEB and white
balance bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be
canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie
shooting.
1: Off
The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be
canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash
is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be
canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.)
413
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn I -4
Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence
can be changed.
0: 09-9+
1: -909+
2: +909White Balance Bracketing
B/A Direction
M/G Direction
AEB
0 : Standard
exposure
- : Decreased
exposure
+ : Increased
exposure
0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance
C.Fn I -5
- : Blue bias
- : Magenta bias
+ : Amber bias
+ : Green bias
Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can
be changed from the default 3 shots to 2, 5, or 7 shots.
When [Bracketing sequence: 0] is set, the bracketed shots will be
taken as shown in the table below.
0: 3 shots
1: 2 shots
2: 5 shots
(1-stop/step increments)
3: 7 shots
1st Shot
2nd
Shot
3rd
Shot
+1
4th
Shot
5th
Shot
0: 3 shots
Standard (0)
-1
1: 2 shots
Standard (0)
±1
2: 5 shots
Standard (0)
-2
-1
+1
+2
3: 7 shots
Standard (0)
-3
-2
-1
+1
6th
Shot
7th
Shot
+2
+3
If [1:2 shots] is set, you can select the + or - side when setting the AEB
range. With WB bracketing, the 2nd shot will be adjusted toward the minus
direction for either B/A or M/G (toward Blue and Magenta).
414
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn I -6
Safety shift
0: Disable
1: Shutter speed/Aperture
Takes effect in the <s> shutter-priority AE and <f> aperturepriority AE modes. If the subject brightness changes and the
standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure
range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected
setting to obtain the standard exposure.
2: ISO speed
Works in the <d> Program AE, <s> shutter-priority AE, and
<f> aperture-priority AE modes. If the subject brightness
changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the
autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the
manually set ISO speed to obtain the standard exposure.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], even if [Range for stills] or [Min.
shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will
override it if the standard exposure cannot be obtained.
 The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO
speed will be determined by the [Auto range] setting (p.152). However, if
the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [Auto range], the safety shift
will take effect up or down to the manually set ISO speed.
 Safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used.
415
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II: Autofocus
C.Fn II -1
Tracking sensitivity
Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity during
AI Servo AF when an obstacle cuts across
the AF points or when the AF points stray
from the subject.
0: Default setting suited for most subjects. Suitable for moving
subjects in general.
Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1
The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an
obstacle cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from the
AF points. The -2 setting makes the camera keep tracking the
target subject longer than the -1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take
slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject.
Responsive: +2 / Responsive:+1
The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different
distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when
you want to always focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is
more responsive than the +1 setting when focusing on the next
subject.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an
unintended subject.
[Tracking sensitivity] is the feature named [AI Servo tracking sensitivity]
in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and EOS 7D.
416
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -2
Acceleration/deceleration tracking
This sets the tracking sensitivity for moving
subjects whose speed can momentarily
change dramatically by starting or stopping
suddenly, etc.
0: Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in
moving speed).
+2 / +1:
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden
acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving
subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera continues
to focus on the target subject. For example, for an approaching
subject, the camera becomes less prone to focus behind it to avoid
subject blur. For a subject stopping suddenly, the camera becomes
less prone to focus in front of it. Setting +2 can track dramatic changes
in the moving subject’s speed better than with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements
of the subject, the focusing may be unstable momentarily.
C.Fn II -3
AF point auto switching
This sets the switching sensitivity of the AF
points as they track the subject moving
dramatically up, down, left, or right.
This setting takes effect when the AF area
selection mode is set to Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), or 45-point automatic
selection AF.
0: Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.
+2 / +1:
Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right and
moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its focus to neighboring
AF points to continue focusing on the subject. The camera switches to the
AF point deemed most likely to focus on the subject based on the subject’s
continual movement, contrast, etc. Setting +2 makes the camera more prone
to switch the AF point than with +1.
However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the subject
is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with the wrong AF point.
417
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -4
AI Servo 1st image priority
You can set the AF operation
characteristics and shutter-release timing
for the first shot with AI Servo AF.
Equal priority:
Equal priority is given to focusing and shutter release.
s: Release priority
Pressing the shutter button takes the picture immediately even if
focus has not been achieved. Useful when you want to give priority
to capturing the image rather than achieving focus.
t: Focus priority
Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is achieved.
Useful when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot.
C.Fn II -5
AI Servo 2nd image priority
You can set the AF operation
characteristics and shutter-release timing
during continuous shooting after the first
shot with AI Servo AF.
Equal priority:
Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed. In
low light or with low-contrast subjects, shooting speed may slow down.
v:Shooting speed priority
Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of
achieving focus.
t: Focus priority
Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous shooting
speed. The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved.
Under shooting conditions which activate anti-flicker shooting (p.179), even
if [Speed] is set, the continuous shooting speed may become slower or the
shooting interval may become irregular.
418
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -6
AF-assist beam firing
Enables or disables the built-in flash’s AF-assist beam or the EOSdedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.
0: Enable
The AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary.
1: Disable
The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. This prevents the AFassist beam from disturbing others.
2: Enable external flash only
If an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam
when necessary. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the AFassist beam.
3: IR AF assist beam only
When an external Speedlite is attached, only the infrared AF-assist
beam will be emitted. Set this when you do not want the camera to
fire the AF-assist beam as a burst of small flashes.
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED
light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.
If the external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set
to [Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist
beam will not be emitted.
C.Fn II -7
Lens drive when AF impossible
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera
keep searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching.
0: Continue focus search
1: Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be
achieved, the lens drive stops. This prevents the lens from
becoming grossly out of focus due to focus searching.
Super telephoto lenses, etc., with a wide focusing drive range can become
grossly out of focus during focus search, taking more time to achieve focus
next time. Setting [1: Stop focus search] is recommended.
419
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -8
Select AF area selection mode
You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your
shooting preferences. Select the desired selection mode and press
<0> to add a checkmark [X]. Then select [OK] to register the
setting.
E: Manual selection:1 pt AF
You can select one AF point.
F: Manual select.:Zone AF
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing.
G: Manual select.:Large Zone AF
The AF area is divided into three focusing zones for focusing.
H: Auto selection:45 pt AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used for focusing.
 The [X] mark cannot be deleted from [Manual selection:1 pt AF].
 If the attached lens belongs to group H (p.131), you can only select
[Manual selection:1 pt AF].
C.Fn II -9
AF area selection method
You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.
0: S 9 AF area selection button
After you press the <S> or <B> button, each time you press the
<B> button, the AF area selection mode changes.
1: S 9 Main Dial
After you press the <S> or <B> button, turning the <6> dial
changes the AF area selection mode.
When [1: S 9 Main Dial] is set, use <9> to move the AF point
horizontally.
420
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -10
Orientation linked AF point
You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point
separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.
0: Same for both vertical/horizontal
The same AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF
point (or zone) are used for both vertical shooting and horizontal
shooting.
1: Separate AF pts: Area+pt
The AF area selection mode and AF point (or zone) can be set
separately for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical
with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at
the bottom).
When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF
point (or zone) for each of the three camera orientations, they will
be registered for the respective orientation. Whenever you change
the camera orientation during shooting, the camera will switch to
the AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or
zone) set for that orientation.
2: Separate AF pts: Pt only
The AF point can be set separately for each camera orientation (1.
Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical
with the camera grip at the bottom). While using the same AF area
selection mode, the AF point will switch automatically for the
respective camera orientation.
When you manually select the AF point for each of the three
camera orientations, it will be registered for the respective
orientation. During shooting, the AF point will switch to the
manually-selected one depending on the camera orientation. Even
if you change the AF area selection mode to Manual selection:1 pt
AF, the AF point set for the respective orientation will be retained.
If you change the AF area selection mode to Zone AF (manual
selection of zone) or Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone),
the zone will switch to the manually-selected one depending on
the camera orientation.
If you set this and later attach a lens from a different AF group (p.128-131,
particularly Group H), the setting may be cleared.
421
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -11
Initial AF Point, o AI Servo AF
You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area
selection mode is set to Auto selection: 45 pt AF.
0: Auto
The AF point which AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to
suit the shooting conditions.
1: Initial o AF pt selected
AI Servo AF will start with the manually-selected AF point when
the AF operation is set to AI Servo AF and the AF area selection
mode is set to Auto selection: 45 pt AF.
2: Manual S AF pt
If you switch from Manual selection:1 pt AF to Auto selection: 45 pt
AF, AI Servo AF will start with the AF point that was manually
selected before the switch. Convenient if you want AI Servo AF to
start with the AF point that was selected before the AF area
selection mode was switched to Auto selection: 45 pt AF.
When [2: Manual S AF pt] is set, AI Servo AF will start with the zone that
corresponds to the manually selected AF point, even if you switch AF area
selection mode to Zone AF (manual selection of zone) or Large Zone AF
(manual selection of zone).
C.Fn II -12
Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking
Use this function to autofocus by recognizing colors equivalent to skin
tones. This function works when the AF area selection mode is set to
Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection
of zone), or 45-point automatic selection AF.
0: Enable
The camera selects AF points automatically based on AF
information and information on colors equivalent to skin tones.
In One-Shot AF mode, focusing on a still human subject in the AF
area is made easier.
In AI Servo AF mode, focusing on a human subject in the AF area
is made easier. If no skin tones can be detected, the nearest
subject will be focused on. Once focus is achieved, AF points are
automatically selected so that the camera continues to focus on
the color of the area it focused on first.
1: Disable
AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.
422
3 Custom Function SettingsN
 With setting [0: Enable], focusing will take slightly longer than with
setting [1: Disable].
 Even with setting [0: Enable], the expected result may not be obtained
depending on the shooting conditions and subject.
 Under light so low that the flash emits the AF-assist beam automatically,
AF points are selected automatically based only on AF information. (The
AF will not use information on colors equivalent to skin tones.)
C.Fn II -13
AF point selection movement
During manual AF point selection, the selection can either stop at the
outer edge or it can cycle around to the opposite side.
This works with any AF area selection mode other than 45-point
automatic selection AF (with AI Servo AF enabled).
0: Stops at AF area edges
Useful if you often use an AF point along the edge.
1: Continuous
Instead of stopping at the outer edge, the selection of AF point
continues to the opposite side.
C.Fn II -14
AF point display during focus
You can set whether or not to display the AF point(s) in the following
cases: 1. when selecting the AF point(s), 2. when the camera is ready
to shoot (before AF operation), 3. during AF operation, and 4. when
focus is achieved.
0: Selected (constant)
The selected AF point(s) is always displayed.
1: All (constant)
All the AF points are always displayed.
2: Selected (pre-AF, focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1, 2, and 4.
3: Selected (focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1 and 4.
4: Disable display
For 2, 3, and 4, the selected AF point(s) will not be displayed.
If [2: Selected (pre-AF, focused)] or [3: Selected (focused)] is set, the AF
point will not be displayed even when focus is achieved with AI Servo AF.
423
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn II -15
Viewfinder display illumination
You can set whether or not the AF points in the viewfinder will light up
in red when focus is achieved.
0: Auto
The AF points automatically light up in red under low light.
1: Enable
The AF points light up in red regardless of the ambient light level.
2: Disable
The AF points do not light up in red.
When you press the <Q> button with [0: Auto] or [1: Enable] set, you
can set whether the AF point lights up in red (blink) during AI Servo AF.
AF point during AI Servo AF
OFF: Non illuminated
The AF points will not light up during AI
Servo AF.
ON: Illuminated
The AF points used for focusing light up in
red during AI Servo AF. They are also
illuminated during continuous shooting.
This function will not work if [VF display
illumination] is set to [2: Disable].
 When you press the <S> or <B> button, the AF points will be
illuminated in red regardless of this setting.
 The aspect ratio lines (p.146), and the electronic level, grid, and flicker
detection set with [52:Viewfinder display] will also light up in red.
C.Fn II -16
AF Microadjustment
You can make fine adjustments for the AF’s point of focus. For details,
see page 427.
424
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn III: Operation/Others
C.Fn III -1
Warnings z in viewfinder
When any of the following functions are set, the <z> icon can be
displayed on the viewfinder’s bottom right (p.29). The <z> icon will
also appear on the shooting function settings display (p.55).
Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear,
press <0> to add a checkmark [X], then select [OK].
When monochrome V is set:
If the Picture Style is set to [Monochrome] (p.155), the warning
icon will appear.
When WB is corrected:
If white balance correction is set (p.167), the warning icon will
appear.
When M is set:
If [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] (p.170), the warning icon will appear.
When HDR is set:
If [z3: HDR Mode] is set (p.207), the warning icon will appear.
C.Fn III -2
Dial direction during Tv/Av
0: Normal
1: Reverse direction
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture
can be reversed.
In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and
<5> dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning
direction of only the <6> dial will be reversed. The <5> dial’s
turning direction in the <a> mode and the turning direction to set
the exposure compensation in the <d>, <s>, and <f> mode
will be the same.
425
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn III -3
Retract lens on power off
This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven
STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You
can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when the camera’s
power switch is set to <2>.
0: Enable
1: Disable
 With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
 Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
With setting [0: Enable], this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s
focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).
C.Fn III -4
Custom Controls
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences. For details, see page 433.
426
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder
shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the
adjustment, read “General Cautions for AF Microadjustment” on page
432.
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment
only if necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent
accurate focusing from being achieved.
1: Adjust All by Same Amount
Set the adjustment amount manually by repeatedly making
adjustments, shooting, and checking the results until the desired result
is achieved. During AF, regardless of the lens used, the point of focus
will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
1
Select [C.Fn II: Autofocus].
 Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn II:
Autofocus], then press <0>.
2 Select [16: AF Microadjustment].
3 Select [1: All by same amount].
the <Q> button.
4 Press
 The [1: All by same amount] screen
will appear.
427
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
the adjustment.
5 Make
 Set the adjustment amount. The
adjustable range is ±20 steps.
 Setting it toward “-:a” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
 Setting it toward “+:b” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
 After making the adjustment, press
<0>.
 Select [1: All by same amount], then
press <0>.
 Press the <M> button to exit.
the result of the
6 Check
adjustment.
 Take a picture and play back the
image (p.346) to check the
adjustment result.
 If the shooting result comes out with
focus in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+:b” side. If it
comes out with focus behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-:a” side.
 If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
If [1: All by same amount] is selected, separate AF adjustment will not be
possible for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.
428
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
2: Adjust by Lens
You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment
in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.
When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the
point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
Set the adjustment manually by repeatedly making adjustments,
shooting, and checking the results until the desired result is achieved. If
you use a zoom lens, make the adjustment for the wide-angle (W) and
telephoto (T) ends.
1
Select [2: Adjust by lens].
the <Q> button.
2 Press
 The [2: Adjust by lens] screen will
appear.
and change the lens information.
3 Check
Checking the Lens Information
Registered number
 Press the <B> button.
 The screen will show the lens name
and a 10-digit serial number. When
the serial number is displayed, select
[OK] and go to step 4.
 If the lens’s serial number cannot be
confirmed, “0000000000” will be
displayed. In this case, enter the
number by following the instructions
on the next page.
 Regarding the asterisk “ * ” displayed
in front of some lens serial numbers,
see the next page.
429
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
Entering the Serial Number
 Select the digit to be entered, then
press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Enter the number, then press <0>.
 After entering all the digits, select
[OK].
Lens Serial Number
 In step 3, if “ * ” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial
number, you can register only one unit of the same lens model.
Even if you enter the serial number, “ * ” will remain displayed.
 The lens serial number on the lens may differ from the serial
number displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a
malfunction.
 If the lens serial number includes letters, enter only the numbers.
 If the lens serial number is eleven digits or longer, enter only the last
ten digits.
 The location of the serial number varies depending on the lens.
 Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed. To register a
lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number.
 If [2: Adjust by lens] is selected and an Extender is used, the
adjustment will be registered for the lens and Extender combination.
 If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After
you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you
can register another lens.
430
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
Single focal length lens
the adjustment.
4 Make
 For a zoom lens, select the wide-

Zoom lens






angle (W) or telephoto (T) end.
Pressing <0> will turn off the frame
and make the adjustment possible.
Set the adjustment amount, then
press <0>. The adjustable range is
±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-:a” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+:b” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
For a zoom lens, repeat this
procedure and adjust it for the wideangle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
After completing the adjustment,
press the <M> button to return to
the screen in step 1.
Select [2: Adjust by lens], then
press <0>.
Press the <M> button to exit.
the result of the
5 Check
adjustment.
 Take a picture and play back the
image (p.346) to check the
adjustment result.
 If the shooting result comes out with
focus in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+:b” side. If it
comes out with focus behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-:a” side.
 If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
431
8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus
When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the
AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments
made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or
telephoto end has been adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for
the intermediate range.
Clearing All AF Microadjustments
When [j Clear all] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the
<L> button will clear all the adjustments made for [1: All by same
amount] and [2: Adjust by lens].
General Cautions for AF Microadjustment
 The AF’s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject
conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.
Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not
be achieved at the suitable position.
 The adjustment amount of one stop varies depending on the maximum
aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus
repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.
 The adjustment will not be applied to AF during Live View shooting or
movie shooting.
 If you clear all the Custom Function settings (p.410), the AF
Microadjustment will be retained. However, the setting will become [0:
Disable].
Notes for AF Microadjustment
 It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will
shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.
 Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.
 For making adjustments, shooting at the 73 image-recording quality is
recommended.
432
8: Custom Controls
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences.
1
Select [C.Fn III: Operation/
Others].
 Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn III:
Operation/Others], then press
<0>.
[4: Custom Controls].
2 Select
 The Custom Controls screen will
appear.
a camera button or dial.
3 Select
 Select a camera button or dial, then
press <0>.
 The name of the camera control and
the assignable functions will be
displayed.
 The location of the camera control
can be checked in the illustration on
the left side of the screen.
a function.
4 Assign
 Select a function, then press <0>.
the setting.
5 Exit
 When you press <0> to exit the setting,
the screen in step 3 will reappear.
 Press the <M> button to exit.
With the screen in step 3 displayed, you can press the <L> button to cancel
the Custom Control settings. Note that the [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls]
settings will not be canceled even if you select [8: Clear all Custom Func.
(C.Fn)].
433
8: Custom Controls
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
a
AF
b AF stop
c ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO
S
Exposure
Page
Metering and AF start
V
r
t
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
436
AF point direct selection
k
q
Metering start
t
AE lock/FE lock
A
AE lock
A
AE lock (while button pressed)
T
AE lock (hold)
k
k
d
FE lock
k
k
k
k
437
k
e Set ISO speed (hold button, turnS)
Flash
Images
Operation
f
Exposure compensation
(hold button, turnS)
s
Shutter speed setting in M mode
f
Aperture setting in M mode
y
Flash exposure compensation
0/3 Flash function settings
g
Image quality
A
Picture Style
B
White balance selection
h
Depth-of-field preview
i
IS start
M Menu display
j No function (disabled)
434
438
438
439
439
8: Custom Controls
e
0*
s
S
T
T
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
* The AF stop button (0) is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses.
435
8: Custom Controls
a: Metering and AF start
When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF
are executed.
b: AF stop
The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this
function. Useful when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF.
c: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO
You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you hold
down the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches
to AI Servo AF mode*. In the AI Servo AF mode, the camera switches to
One-Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button. Useful when
you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo AF for
a subject that keeps moving and stopping.
* Servo AF mode for Live View shooting.
This setting is disabled when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set during Live
View shooting.
S: AF point direct selection
During metering, you can select an AF point directly with <9> without
pressing the <S> or <B> button.
436
8: Custom Controls
q: Metering start
When you press the shutter button halfway, exposure metering is
performed (AF is not performed).
t: AE lock/FE lock
Normal shooting (No flash)
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) during the metering. Useful when you want to focus
and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take multiple
shots at the same exposure setting.
With flash
During flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function
will fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
A: AE lock
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) during the metering. Useful when you want to focus
and meter the shot separately.
A: AE lock (while button pressed)
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you press the shutter
button.
T: AE lock (hold)
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the
button again. Useful when you want to focus and meter the shot
separately or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting.
437
8: Custom Controls
d: FE lock
For flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function will
fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
e: Set ISO speed (hold button, turnS)
You can set the ISO speed by holding down <0> and turning the
<6> dial. If this control is used while ISO Auto is set, manual ISO
speed setting will take effect. If you use this function in the <a> mode,
you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the
current shutter speed and aperture.
f: Exposure compensation (hold button, turnS)
You can set the exposure compensation by holding down <0> and
turning the <6> dial. Useful when you want to set exposure
compensation in <a> manual exposure with ISO Auto set.
s: Shutter speed setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the shutter speed with the
<6> or <5> dial.
f: Aperture setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the aperture with the <5> or
<6> dial.
y: Flash exposure compensation
Press <0> to display the exposure compensation setting screen
(p.230) for the attached (built-in or external) flash unit on the LCD
monitor.
0/3: Flash function settings
Press <0> to display the flash function setting screen (p.237) on the
LCD monitor.
438
8: Custom Controls
g: Image quality
Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen
(p.142) on the LCD monitor.
A: Picture Style
Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection setting screen on the
LCD monitor (p.154).
B: White balance selection
Press <0> to display the white balance setting screen (p.162) on the
LCD monitor.
h: Depth-of-field preview
When you press the depth-of-field preview button, the aperture will stop
down and you can check the depth of field (p.195).
i: IS start
If you press the button assigned to this function when the lens’s IS
switch is set to <1>, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will operate.
M: Menu display
Press <0> to display the menu on the LCD monitor.
j: No function (disabled)
Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the
button.
439
3 Registering My MenuN
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom
Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name
the registered menu tabs and press the <M> button to display the
My Menu tab first.
Creating and Adding My Menu Tab
1
Select [Add My Menu tab].
 Under the [9] tab, select [Add My
Menu tab], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 The [MY MENU1] tab is created.
 You can create up to five menu tabs
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
1
440
Select [Configure: MY MENU*].
 Turn the <6> dial to select
[Configure: MY MENU*] (tab for
registering menu items), then press
<0>.
3 Registering My MenuN
2 Select [Select items to register].
the desired items.
3 Register
 Select the desired item, then press
<0>.
 Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
 You can register up to six items.
 To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under the
menu tab, and rename or delete the
menu tab.
 Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort registered items] and select the item whose order you want to
change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, press the <W> <X>
keys to change the order, then press <0>.
 Delete selected items / Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all
registered items.
441
3 Registering My MenuN
 Delete tab
You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [Delete
tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab.
 Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1 Select [Rename tab].
text.
2 Enter
 Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
 Press the <Q> button to toggle
between the top and bottom entry
areas.
 Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z>
keys to move the n and select the
desired character. Then press <0>
to enter it.
 By selecting [E] and pressing
<0>, you can change the input
mode.
 To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation screen.
 You can enter up to 16 characters.
the setting.
3 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
 The name is saved.
442
3 Registering My MenuN
Deleting All My Menu Tabs / Deleting All Items
You can delete all My Menu tabs or all
My Menu items you created.
 Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select
[Delete all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY
MENU5] will be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
 Delete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to
[MY MENU5] tabs and keep the tabs. The menu tab(s) will remain.
When [Delete all items] is selected, all the items registered under
all the created tabs will be deleted.
If you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names
renamed with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
443
3 Registering My MenuN
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear first when
you press the <M> button.
 Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
 Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [9] tab selected.
 Display only My Menu tab
Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The z, 3, 5, and 8 tabs will not
be displayed.)
444
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode,
menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting
modes under the Mode Dial’s <w> and <x> positions.
1
Select [Custom shooting mode
(C1, C2)].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
shooting mode (C1, C2)], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Register settings].
the Custom shooting
3 Register
mode.
 Select the Custom shooting mode to
be registered, then press <0>.
 Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
 The current camera settings (p.446)
will be registered under the Mode
Dial’s C* position.
Automatic Update of Registered Settings
If you change a setting while shooting in the <w> or <x> mode, the
respective Custom shooting mode can be automatically updated to
reflect the changes in settings. To enable this automatic update, in step
2, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable].
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings for respective
modes can be reverted to the default settings with no Custom shooting
modes registered.
445
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
Settings To Be Registered
 Shooting functions
Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation,
AF area selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode,
Exposure compensation amount, Flash exposure compensation
amount
 Menu functions
[z1] Image quality, Image review time, Beep, Release shutter
without card, Lens aberration correction, Flash firing, E-TTL II
flash metering, Flash sync speed in Av mode, Red-eye
reduction
[z2] Exposure compensation/AEB, ISO speed settings, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, White balance, White balance shift/
bracketing, Color space
[z3] Picture Style, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO speed
noise reduction, Highlight tone priority, Multiple exposure
(settings), HDR Mode (settings)
[z4] Interval timer, Bulb timer, Anti-flicker shooting, Mirror lockup,
Aspect ratio
[z5 (Live View shooting)]
Live View shooting, AF method, Touch shutter, Grid display,
Exposure simulation
[z6 (Live View shooting)]
Silent LV shooting, Metering timer
[z4 (Movie shooting)]
Movie Servo AF, AF method, Movie recording quality, Digital
zoom, Sound recording, Movie Servo AF speed, Movie Servo
AF tracking sensitivity
[z5 (Movie shooting)]
Metering timer, Grid display, V button function, Video
snapshot, Time-lapse movie (settings), Remote control shooting
[x2] Slide show (settings), Image jump with <6>
[x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram
display
446
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
[51] File numbering, Auto rotate
[52] Auto power off, LCD brightness, LCD off/on button, Viewfinder
display
[53] Touch control, Auto cleaning, z button display options
[54] Multi function lock
[81] Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments,
Bracketing auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of
bracketed shots, Safety shift
[82] Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking, AF
point auto switching, AI Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd
image priority, AF-assist beam firing, Lens drive when AF
impossible, Select AF area selection mode, AF area selection
method, Orientation linked AF point, Initial AF point, o AI
Servo AF, Auto AF point selection: Color Tracking, AF point
selection movement, AF point display during focus, Viewfinder
display illumination, AF Microadjustment
[83] Dial direction during Tv/Av, Retract lens on power off, Custom
Controls
 My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes.
 When the Mode Dial is set to <w> or <x>, you cannot select [54:
Clear all camera settings] or [8:Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)].
 Even when the Mode Dial is set to <w> or <x>, you can still change
shooting function settings and menu settings.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can check which shooting mode is
registered under <w> and <x> (p.450-451).
447
MEMO
448
13
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.
Certification Logo
Select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to
display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other
certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the
camera body, and on the camera’s package.
449
B Button Functions
When you press the <B> button
while the camera is ready to shoot, you
can display [Displays camera settings],
[Electronic level] (p.72), and [Displays
shooting functions] (p.451).
Under the [53] tab, [z button
display options] enables you to select
the options displayed when the <B>
button is pressed.
 Select the desired display option and
press <0> to add a checkmark [X].
 After completing the selections, select
[OK].
 Note that you cannot remove the [X] for all three display options.
 The [Displays camera settings] sample screen is displayed in English
for all languages.
 Even if you uncheck the [Electronic level] so it does not appear, it will
still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press
the <B> button.
Camera Settings
Shooting mode
registered under the
Mode Dial’s wx
<8> mode (p.88)
<v> mode (p.101)
(p.181)
(p.167-168)
(p.166)
(p.172)
(p.170)
(p.230)
(p.37, 143)
450
B Button Functions
Shooting Function Settings
White balance correction
Shutter speed
Aperture
AE lock
Flash exposure compensation
Shooting mode
ISO speed
Exposure level
indicator
Highlight tone priority
Exposure
compensation
Wi-Fi function
Picture Style
Custom Controls
AF operation
Image-recording
quality
Quick Control icon
Possible shots
Battery level
AF point selection
Wireless signal strength/
Eye-Fi card transmission status
White balance
GPS acquisition status
Metering mode
Maximum burst/Number of
remaining multiple exposures
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Multiple exposures/HDR/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Drive mode
White balance bracketing
 Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
settings (p.56).
 When you press the <f>, <R>, <i>, <D>, <S>, or <B>
button, the setting screen will appear and you can use <6>, <5>,
<9>, and <B> to set the function.
If you turn off the power while the “Shooting function settings display” screen
is displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power
again. To cancel this, press the <B> button to exit from “Shooting
function settings display” screen, then turn off the power switch.
451
3 Checking the Battery Information
You can check the condition of the battery you are using on the LCD
monitor. Each Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 has a unique serial number,
and you can register multiple batteries to the camera. When you use
this feature, you can check the registered batteries’ remaining capacity
and operation history.
Select [Battery info.].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Battery
info.], then press <0>.
 The battery info. screen will appear.
Battery position
Battery model or household power source
being used.
The battery level indicator (p.42) is
displayed together with the remaining
battery level shown in 1% increments.
The number of shots taken with the current
battery. The number is reset when the
battery is recharged.
Battery’s recharge performance level is
displayed in one of three levels.
(Green) : Battery’s recharge
performance is fine.
(Green) : Battery’s recharge performance
is slightly degraded.
(Red) : Purchasing a new battery is
recommended.
Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If
you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, this camera’s full
performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
 The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movies are not
counted.)
 The battery information will also be displayed when Battery Pack LPE6N/LP-E6 is used with Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately). If AA/R6
batteries are used, only the remaining battery level will be displayed.
 If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the
message.
452
3 Checking the Battery Information
Registering Batteries to the Camera
You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 batteries to the camera. To
register multiple batteries to the camera, follow the procedure below for
each battery.
1
Press the <B> button.
 With the battery info. screen
displayed, press the <B> button.
 The battery history screen will
appear.
 If the battery is not registered, it will
be grayed out.
[Register].
2 Select
 The confirmation dialog will appear.
[OK].
3 Select
 The battery will be registered and the
battery history screen will reappear.
 The grayed out battery number will
now be displayed in white.
 Press the <M> button. The
battery info. screen will reappear.
 The battery cannot be registered if Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold
separately) using AA/R6 batteries is attached or the camera is powered
by the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and AC Adapter AC-E6N
(sold separately).
 If six batteries are already registered, [Register] cannot be selected. To
delete unnecessary battery information, see page 455.
453
3 Checking the Battery Information
Labeling the Serial Number on the Battery
It is convenient to label each registered Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6
with their serial numbers, using commercially-available labels.
1
Serial number
Write the serial number on a
label.
 Write the serial number displayed on
the battery history screen on a label
approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6
in. in size.
7c40
0300
the battery and affix the
2 Remove
label.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Open the battery compartment cover
and remove the battery.
 Affix the label as shown in the
illustration (on the side with no
electrical contacts).
 Repeat this procedure for all of your
batteries so you can easily see the
serial number.
 Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in
step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the
battery or impossible to turn on the camera.
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E14 (sold separately), the label may peel off
as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery. If it peels off, affix a new
label.
454
3 Checking the Battery Information
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery
You can check the remaining capacity of any battery (even when not
installed) and also when it was last used.
Serial number Date last used
Look for the serial number.
 Match the battery’s serial number on
the battery history screen with the
battery’s serial number label.
 You can check the respective
battery’s remaining capacity and the
date when it was last used.
Battery level
Deleting the Registered Battery Information
1
Select [Delete info.].
 Follow step 2 on page 453 to select [Delete info.], then press
<0>.
2 Select the battery information to be deleted.
 Select the battery information to be deleted, then press <0>.
 [X] will appear.
 To delete information for another battery, repeat this procedure.
3 Press the <L> button.
 The confirmation dialog will appear.
4 Select [OK].
 The battery information will be deleted and the screen in step 1
will reappear.
455
Using a Household Power Outlet
You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the
DC Coupler DR-E6 and AC Adapter AC-E6N (both sold separately).
1
Place the cord in the groove.
 Insert the DC coupler’s cord carefully
without damaging the cord.
the DC coupler.
2 Insert
 Open the battery compartment cover
DC coupler cord hole
and open the DC coupler cord hole
cover.
 Insert the DC coupler securely until it
locks and put the cord through the
hole.
 Close the cover.
the DC coupler’s plug.
3 Connect
 Connect the DC coupler’s plug and
the AC adapter’s connector securely.
the power cord.
4 Connect
 Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
 After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC coupler while leaving
the camera’s power switch set to the <1> position.
AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) can also be used.
456
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to
an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card
functions (including wireless transfer). In case of a problem
with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.
Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in
many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card
is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been
approved for use in your area, please check with the card
manufacturer.
1 Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.37).
[Eye-Fi settings].
2 Select
 Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
 This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.
Eye-Fi transmission.
3 Enable
 Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press
<0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 If you set [Disable], there will be no
automatic transmission even with the
Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission
status icon I).
457
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
the connection
4 Display
information.
 Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
the [Access point SSID:].
5 Check
 Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
 You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
the picture.
6 Take
 The picture is transferred and the
Transmission status icon
<H> icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons below.
 For transferred images, [O] is
displayed in the shooting information
display (p.348).
H (Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.
H (Blinking) Connecting...: Connecting to access point.
H (Illuminated) Connected: Connection to access point
H (d) Transferring...
458
established.
: Image transfer to access point in
progress.
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
 If [Wi-Fi/NFC] under [51: Wireless communication settings] is set to
[Enable], image transfer with an Eye-Fi card is not possible.
 If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
 Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.
 If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.
 Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.
 The Eye-Fi card may become hot as it transmits.
 The camera’s battery power will be consumed faster.
 During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
 If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [Eye-Fi
settings] will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon <H> will not
appear.
459
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting in Basic Zone Modes: A 7 C 8
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
A 7 C
Image quality settings selectable k k k
: Not selectable/Disabled
8
P
C x 6
F
k
k k k k*1 k*1 k k k k
G
2 3 4 5
o
o o o o
Aspect ratio
ISO speed
Picture
Style
Automatically set/Auto o o o
Automatically set
DDD D DDD D
D DDDD
Manual selection
Ambience-based shots
k
k
Lighting/scene based shots
Background blur
Color tone
Auto
White
balance
o o o o o
Manually set
k k k k
k
k k k k
k k k k
k
k
k
QQQQw QQQ Q Q QQQQ
Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing
o
o
o
o o o o
o o o o
o o o o
o o o o o
o o o o o
o o o o o
o
o o o o
o o o o o
o o o
o o o
o
o
o o o o
o o o o
o o o o o
o o o o o
Evaluative metering o o o
Center-weighted average metering
o
o
o o o o o
Auto Lighting Optimizer
o o o
Peripheral illumination correction o o o
Lens
aberration Chromatic aberration correction o o o
correction Distortion correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction o o o
Highlight tone priority
Anti-flicker shooting*2
Color
space
Metering
mode
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Metering mode selection
*1: RAW+JPEG or RAW cannot be selected.
*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.
460
o o
o
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Function
AF operation One-Shot AF
(Viewfinder AI Servo AF
shooting)
AI Focus AF
AF operation One-Shot AF
(Live View shooting) Servo AF
AF area selection mode
AF point
AF
AF-assist beam
AF Microadjustment*2
Program shift
Exposure compensation
AEB
AE lock
Exposure
Depth-of-field preview
HDR shooting
Multiple exposure
Interval timer*2
Single shooting
High-speed continuous shooting
Low-speed continuous shooting
Drive
Silent single shooting*2
Silent continuous shooting*2
Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control
Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control
Automatic firing
Flash on (Fires at all times)
Flash off
Built-in flash Red-eye reduction
FE lock*2
Flash exposure compensation
Wireless control
Flash on (Fires at all times)
Flash off
External
flash
Function settings
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
Quick Control
A 7 C
8
P C x 6 F G 2 3 4 5
o
o o o o*3 o*3 o o
o*3
o*3
o*3 o*3 o*3
o o o o
o o o o o o
o
o
o o o o o o o o o o o o o
o
o o
o o o o o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k k
k k
k k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k o k
k k
k
o o o o o o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o o o o
o
k k k k k
k k k k k k k
k k k k k k k k k k k k k
*3: AF will be performed using color tracking.
461
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting in Basic Zone Modes: v
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
Image quality settings selectable*1
: Not selectable/Disabled
v
G
W
X
H
c
Z
A B C D
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Aspect ratio
ISO speed
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto
Manually set
Automatically set
PPPPPPPPPP
Manual selection
Ambience-based shots
Lighting/scene based shots
Background blur
Color tone
Auto
White
balance
Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Lens
aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination correction o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Chromatic aberration correction o
Distortion correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
Highlight tone priority
Anti-flicker shooting*2
Color space
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Evaluative metering
Metering
mode
Center-weighted average metering
Metering mode selection
*1: RAW+JPEG or RAW cannot be selected.
*2: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.
462
o
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Function
AF operation One-Shot AF
(Viewfinder AI Servo AF
shooting)
AI Focus AF
AF operation (Live One-Shot AF
View shooting)
Servo AF
AF area selection mode
AF point
AF
AF-assist beam
AF Microadjustment*2
Program shift
Exposure compensation
AEB
AE lock
Exposure
Depth-of-field preview
HDR shooting
Multiple exposure
Interval timer*2
Single shooting
High-speed continuous shooting
Low-speed continuous shooting
Drive
Silent single shooting*2
Silent continuous shooting*2
Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control
Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control
Automatic firing
Flash on (Fires at all times)
Flash off
Built-in flash Red-eye reduction
FE lock*2
Flash exposure compensation
Wireless control
Flash on (Fires at all times)
Flash off
External
flash
Function settings
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
Quick Control
v
G
W
X
H
c
Z
A B C D
o*3 o*3 o*3 o*3
o*3 o*3 o o*3 o o*3
o o o o o o o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k k k
k k k
*3: AF will be performed using color tracking.
k
k
k
k
k
k
463
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting in Creative Zone Modes
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
Image quality settings selectable
Aspect ratio
ISO speed
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto
Manually set
Automatically set
Manual selection
: Not selectable/Disabled
d
s
f
a
F
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Ambience-based shots
Lighting/scene based shots
Background blur
Color tone
Creative filters*1*2
Auto
White balance
Preset
Custom
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Lens aberration
correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Distortion correction
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
Highlight tone priority
Anti-flicker shooting*3
Color space
Metering mode
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Evaluative metering
Metering mode selection
*1: RAW+JPEG or RAW cannot be selected.
*2: Settable only during Live View shooting.
*3: Works only during viewfinder shooting.
464
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Function
d
s
f
a
F
One-Shot AF
AI Servo AF
AI Focus AF
AF operation (Live One-Shot AF
View shooting)
Servo AF
AF area selection mode*3
AF point
AF
AF-assist beam
AF Microadjustment*3
Program shift
Exposure compensation
AEB
AE lock
Exposure
Depth-of-field preview
HDR shooting
Multiple exposure
Interval timer*3
Bulb timer
Single shooting
High-speed continuous shooting
Low-speed continuous shooting
Drive mode
Silent single shooting*3
Silent continuous shooting*3
Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control
Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control
Automatic firing
Flash on (Fires at all times)
Flash off
Built-in flash
Red-eye reduction
FE lock*3
Flash exposure compensation
Wireless control
Flash on (Fires at all times)
Flash off
External flash
Function settings
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
AF operation
(Viewfinder
shooting)
*4
k
*5
k
k
k
k
k
k
*4: Settable only when ISO Auto is set.
*5: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
465
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
Movie Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
A
7
: Not selectable/Disabled
C 8 v
d
s f
y
F
k
Movie recording sizes selectable k
k
k
k
Digital zoom
k
k
k
k
HDR movie shooting
k
k
k
k
Video snapshot
k
k
k
k
Time-lapse movie
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
k
Automatically set
DDDDP k
k
k
k
k
Manual selection
k
k
k
k
k
Creative filters
Automatically set/Auto
ISO speed
o
k
Manually set
Picture
Style
Q Q Q Q Q k
k
k
k
k
Preset
k
k
k
k
k
Custom
k
k
k
k
k
Correction
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Auto
White
balance
a
M
o
o
o
o
Peripheral illumination correction o
Lens
aberration Chromatic aberration correction
correction
Distortion correction
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
High ISO speed noise reduction
o
o
o
o
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Highlight tone priority
466
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode
A
Function
C 8 v
d
s f
y
F
k
a
M
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Face+Tracking
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
FlexiZone - Multi
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
FlexiZone - Single
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Manual focus (MF)
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Movie Servo AF
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Exposure compensation
k
k
k
k
*1
AE lock
k
k
k
k
*2
Metering mode
AF
7
Program shift
Exposure
Depth-of-field preview
Aspect ratio
Sound recording
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
*1: Settable only when ISO Auto is set.
*2: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
467
System Map
ST-E2
ST-E3-RT
270EX II
430EX III-RT/
430EX III
600EX-RT/
600EX
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX II
Macro Twin Lite
MT-24EX
Bundled
Accessories
Magnifier
MG-Eb
Eyecup Eb
Eyepiece Extender
EP-EX15
Wide Strap
Rubber Frame Eb
E-series Dioptric
Adjustment Lenses
Battery Pack
LP-E6N*1
Battery Charger
LC-E6 or LC-E6E
Angle Finder C
AC Adapter DC Coupler
AC-E6N*2
DR-E6*2
Battery Grip
BG-E14
Leather Case
EH21-L
Hand Strap E2
468
Battery Magazine
BGM-E14L
for LP-E6N/LP-E6
(attached to BG-E14)
Car Battery
Cable CB-570
Car Battery
Charger
CBC-E6
Battery Magazine
BGM-E14A
for AA/LR6 batteries
(attached to BG-E14)
System Map
Headphones GPS Receiver Remote Remote Switch Timer Remote
Controller
GP-E2
Controller
RS-60E3
TC-80N3
RC-6
EF lenses
EF-S lenses
Remote Controller Adapter RA-E3
Directional Stereo Microphone
DM-E1
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
TV/Video
Interface Cable
IFC-400PCU (1.3 m/4.3 ft.)
Interface Cable IFC-200U/500U
(1.9 m/6.2 ft.) / (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
Connect Station
CS100
USB port
SD/SDHC/SDXC
memory card
Card reader
Card slot
Computer
*1: Battery Pack LP-E6 can also be used.
*2: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.
* Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver.2), WFT-E7 cannot be used.
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
469
3 Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Image quality
Page
1* / 41* / 61*
73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c
142
Image review
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
67
Beep
Enable / Touch to n / Disable
66
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
38
Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /
Disable
Lens aberration
correction
Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /
Disable
175
Distortion correction: Disable / Enable
Flash control
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.
speed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings /
External flash function settings / External flash
C.Fn setting / Clear settings
235
Red-eye reduction
Disable / Enable
230
* Not selectable in the <8: FG> and <v> modes.
Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
470
3 Menu Settings
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
Page
Exposure
compensation/AEB
1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops*
(AEB ±3 stops)
200
201
ISO speed settings
ISO speed / Range for stills / Auto range /
Minimum shutter speed for auto
148
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance
Disable / Low / Standard / High
Disabled in M or B modes
Q (Ambience priority) / Qw (White priority) /
W/E/R/Y/U/D/O/
P (Approx. 2500 - 10000)
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance
White balance shift/
bracketing
Color space
White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias,
9 levels each
White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,
single-level increments, ±3 levels
sRGB / Adobe RGB
169
162
164
167
181
* During Live View shooting, exposure compensation can be set up to ±3 stops.
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / uFine Detail /
SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome /
WUser Def. 1-3
154
Long exposure noise
reduction
Disable / Auto / Enable
172
High ISO speed noise
reduction
Disable / Low / Standard / High / Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
170
Highlight tone priority
Disable / Enable
174
Dust Delete Data
Obtain data to be used by Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software) to delete dust
spots
405
Multiple exposure
Multiple exposure / Multiple exposure control /
Number of exposures / Continue multiple
exposure
212
HDR Mode
Adjust dynamic range / Effect / Continuous
HDR / Auto Image Align
207
471
3 Menu Settings
z: Shooting 4* (Red)
Page
Interval timer
Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots)
223
Bulb timer
Disable / Enable (Exposure time)
205
Anti-flicker shooting
Disable / Enable
179
Mirror lockup
Disable / Enable
219
Aspect ratio
3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1
146
* In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z2] tab.
z: Shooting 5* (Red)
Live View shooting
Enable / Disable
257
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi /
FlexiZone - Single
276
Touch shutter
Disable / Enable
286
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
270
Exposure simulation
Enable / During e / Disable
271
* In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z3] tab.
z: Shooting 6 (Red)
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
272
Metering timer
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.
273
472
3 Menu Settings
x: Playback 1 (Blue)
Page
Protect images
Protect images
376
Rotate image
Rotate images
358
378
Erase images
Erase images
Print order
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
380
Photobook Set-up
Specify images for a photobook
384
Creative filters
Grainy B/W / Soft focus / Fish-eye effect /
Art bold effect / Water painting effect /
Toy camera effect / Miniature effect
399
RAW image processing Process 1 images
390
3: Playback 2 (Blue)
Cropping
Partially crop JPEG images
397
Resize
Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count
395
Rating
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p
359
Slide show
Playback description / Display time / Repeat /
Transition effect / Background music
369
Image jump w/6
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Rating
354
3: Playback 3 (Blue)
Highlight alert
Disable / Enable
351
AF point display
Disable / Enable
352
347
Playback grid
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
Histogram display
Brightness / RGB
352
Control over HDMI
Disable / Enable
374
473
3 Menu Settings
5: Set-up 1 (Yellow)
Page
Select folder
Create and select a folder
File number
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset
182
184
Auto rotate
OnzD / OnD / Off
387
Format card
Initialize and erase data on the card
64
Eye-Fi settings
Displayed when a commercially-available
Eye-Fi card is inserted
457
Wi-Fi/NFC: Disable / Enable
Allow NFC connections
Wireless
communication
settings
Wi-Fi function:
Transfer images between cameras / Connect
to smartphone / Remote control (EOS Utility) /
Print from Wi-Fi printer / View images on DLNA
devices / Upload to Web service
-*
Send images to smartphone
Nickname
Clear Settings
* For details, refer to the Wireless Function Instruction Manual.
5: Set-up 2 (Yellow)
Auto power off
1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. /
30 min. / Disable
66
LCD brightness
Adjust the brightness (seven levels)
386
LCD off/on button
Remains on / Shutter button
67
Date/Time/Zone
Date (year, month, day) / Time (hour, min., sec.) /
Daylight saving time / Time zone
43
LanguageK
Select the interface language
46
Electronic level: Hide / Show
72
Grid display: Hide / Show
71
Flicker detection: Show / Hide
74
Viewfinder display
GPS device settings
474
Settings available when the GPS Receiver GPE2 (sold separately) is attached
-
3 Menu Settings
5: Set-up 3 (Yellow)
Page
307
373
Video system
NTSC / PAL
Feature guide
Enable / Disable
75
Touch control
Standard / Sensitive / Disable
63
Battery information
Power / Remaining capacity / Shutter count /
Recharge performance / Battery registration /
Serial number / Battery history
452
Auto cleaningf: Enable / Disable
404
Sensor cleaning
Clean nowf
Clean manually
407
z button display
options
Displays camera settings / Electronic level /
Displays shooting functions
450
Live View info switch setting: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
262
z button LV display Histogram display: Brightness / RGB /
options
Display size
263
Reset
 When using a wireless function or GPS device, be sure to check the
countries and areas of use, and observe the laws and regulations of the
country or region.
 Note that when connecting GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) with a
cable, preparations as below are necessary.
- Update the GP-E2’s firmware to Version 2.0.0 or later. (Using the cable
for connection is not possible with the firmware version earlier than
Version 2.0.0.)
- An interface cable (sold separately, p.469) must be used.
When using the GP-E2 attached to the hot shoe, preparations as above
are not necessary. For how to update the GP-E2’s firmware, refer to the
Canon Web site.
 Wireless functions cannot be set if the camera is connected to a
computer, GPS receiver, or another device with an interface cable.
475
3 Menu Settings
5: Set-up 4 (Yellow)
Page
Main Dial
Multi function lock
Quick Control Dial
Multi-controller
54
Touch control
Custom shooting mode Register current camera settings to the Mode
(C1, C2)
Dial’s w and x positions
445
Clear all camera
settings
Resets the camera to the default settings
68
Copyright information
Display copyright information /
Enter author’s name /
Enter copyright details /
Delete copyright information
186
Certification Logo
Display
Displays some of the logos of the camera’s
certifications
449
zfirmware ver.*
For updating the firmware
-
* During firmware updates, the touch screen will be disabled to prevent accidental
operations.
8: Custom Functions (Orange)
C.Fn I: Exposure
C.Fn II: Autofocus
413
Customize camera functions as desired
C.Fn III: Operation/
Others
Clear all Custom
Functions (C.Fn)
416
425
Clear all Custom Function settings
410
Add My Menu tabs 1-5
440
9: My Menu (Green)
Add My Menu tab
Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs
443
Delete all items
Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1-5
443
Menu display
Normal display / Display from My Menu tab /
Display only My Menu tab
444
476
3 Menu Settings
Movie Shooting
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Image quality*
Page
1 / 41 / 61
73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c
142
Image review
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
67
Beep
Enable / Touch to n / Disable
66
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
38
Lens aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination correction: Enable /
Disable
Chromatic aberration correction: Enable /
Disable
175
* Still photo shooting is not possible during movie shooting even if [Image quality]
menu is displayed during movie shooting.

Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.
 The menu tabs and options displayed will differ between viewfinder
shooting/Live View shooting and movie shooting. Note that the menu
tabs and options displayed in [x1] Playback 1 to [x3] Playback 3,
[51] Set-up 1 to [54] Set-up 4, [8] Custom Functions, and [9] My
Menu are the same as those displayed in viewfinder shooting/Live View
shooting (p.473-476).
477
3 Menu Settings
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
Exposure
compensation
Page
1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±3 stops
200
ISO speed settings
ISO speed* / Range for movies
148
332
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / High
White balance
Disabled in M or B modes
Q (Ambience priority) / Qw (White priority) /
W/E/R/Y/U/D/O/P (Approx. 2500 10000)
169
162
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance
164
White balance
correction
167
B/A/M/G bias, 9 levels each
* Settable only for manual exposures.
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / uFine Detail / SNeutral
/ UFaithful / VMonochrome / WUser
Def. 1-3
154
High ISO speed noise
reduction
Disable / Low / Standard / High
170
Highlight tone priority
Disable / Enable
174
Dust Delete Data
Obtain data to be used by Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software) to delete dust
spots
405
478
3 Menu Settings
z: Shooting 4*1 (Red)
Page
Movie Servo AF
Enable / Disable
326
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi / FlexiZone Single
327
MOV / MP4
306
Movie recording size (MOV format):
• 1920x1080
• NTSC: 29.97p / 23.98p
PAL: 25.00p
Movie recording quality • ALL-I (For editing)
Movie recording size (MP4 format):
• 1920x1080 / 1280x720
• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p
PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p
• IPB (Standard) / IPB (Light)
307
Digital zoom
311
Disable / Approx. 3-10x zoom
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Sound recording*2
Recording level
Wind filter: Auto / Disable
312
Attenuator: Disable / Enable
When active: Always on / During shooting
Movie Servo AF speed
Movie Servo AF
tracking sensitivity
AF speed: Slow (-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1) /
Standard / Fast (+1/+2)
329
Locked on (-3/-2/-1) / 0 / Responsive (+1/+2/+3)
330
*1: In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z2] tab.
*2: In Basic Zone modes, [Sound recording] will be set to [On/Off].
479
3 Menu Settings
z: Shooting 5*1 (Red)
Page
Metering timer
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.
331
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
331
V button function
a/-/q/-/a/k/q/k
331
Video snapshot: Enable / Disable
Video snapshot
Album settings: Create a new album / Add to
existing album
333
Show confirm message: Enable/Disable
Time-lapse movie
Disable / Enable (Interval / No. of shots / Time
required / Playback time/ Card- time left)
319
Remote control
shooting
Disable / Enable
332
*1: In Basic Zone modes, these menu options are displayed under the [z3] tab.
480
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first consult this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
The battery does not recharge.
 If the battery’s remaining capacity is 94% or higher, the battery will not
be recharged (p.452).
 Do not use any battery other than a genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/LPE6.
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
 If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication
with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery), the protection circuit
will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink in orange at a high
speed. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug from the
power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery to the charger. Wait a few
minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the
problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger’s lamp does not blink.
 If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is high,
the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp off). If
the battery temperature becomes high for any reason during charging,
the charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the battery
temperature goes down, the charging will resume automatically.
The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <1>.




Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.36).
Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.36).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.37).
Recharge the battery (p.34).
481
Troubleshooting Guide
The access lamp still lights or blinks
even when the power switch is <2>.
 If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the
access lamp will remain on/continue to blink for a few seconds. When the
image recording is completed, the power will turn off automatically.
[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon
logo?] is displayed.
 Do not use any battery other than a genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.
 Remove and install the battery again (p.36).
 If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
 Use a fully-charged battery (p.34).
 The battery performance may have degraded. See [53: Battery info.]
to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.452). If the
battery performance is poor, replace the battery with a new one.
 The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged
period.
• The Eye-Fi card’s communication function is enabled.
The camera turns off by itself.
 Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.66).
 Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after the camera is left idle for approx. 30 min. (The
camera’s power does not turn off.)
482
Troubleshooting Guide
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
 The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses (p.47).
The viewfinder is dark.
 Install a recharged battery in the camera (p.34).
No images can be shot or recorded.
 Make sure if the card is properly inserted (p.37).
 Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the write/erase position (p.37).
 If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make space (p.37, 378).
 If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus indicator
<o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the
shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus
manually (p.50, 137).
The card cannot be used.
 If a card error message is displayed, see page 39 or 496.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
 Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Focus lock is not possible in the
AI Servo AF mode or when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF mode
(p.118).
483
Troubleshooting Guide
The image is out of focus or blurred.
 Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (p.47).
 Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.49-50).
 If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
 In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (p.192), set a higher ISO speed (p.148), use flash (p.228, 233),
or use a tripod.
There are fewer AF points.
 Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points and
patterns varies. The lenses are categorized into eight groups from A to
H. Check which group your lens belongs to. Using a lens in Groups E
to H will have fewer usable AF points (p.130-131).
The AF point is blinking.
 Regarding lighting up or blinking of the AF points when you press the
<S> button, see page 123.
The AF points do not light up in red.
 The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low-light
conditions.
 In Creative Zone modes, you can set whether to have the AF points
light up in red when focus is achieved (p.424).
484
Troubleshooting Guide
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
 The continuous shooting speed may become slower depending on the
shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use,
temperature, battery type, remaining battery level, shooting function
settings, etc. For details, see page 139.
With FlexiZone - Multi, it takes longer to focus.
 Depending on the shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus on
the subject. Use FlexiZone - Single or focus manually.
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
 If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the
file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower
than the number listed on page 143.
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion
cannot be selected.
 When [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], ISO100/125/
160 can be set (p.174).
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable ISO
speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 16000 (or up to ISO 12800 for
movie shooting). Even if you expand the settable ISO speed range in
[Range for stills] or [Range for movies], you cannot set expanded
ISO speeds (H).
485
Troubleshooting Guide
Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
 Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Low],
[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come
out bright (p.169).
The multiple-exposure image is shot in 1 quality.
 When the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the
multiple-exposure image will be recorded in 1 quality (p.218).
When I use the <f> mode with flash,
the shutter speed becomes slow.
 If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in
Av mode] to [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)] (p.236).
The built-in flash rises by itself.
 In shooting modes (<A> <C> <8: C624>
<v: GWXHcZ>) whose default setting is <a> (Auto built-in
flash firing), the built-in flash will be raised automatically when
necessary.
 In the <8: xG> and <v: ABCD> modes, when you
press the shutter button halfway under low-light conditions, the built-in
flash may be raised automatically and emit the AF-assist beam.
486
Troubleshooting Guide
The built-in flash does not fire.
 If you use the built-in flash too often in too short a period of time, the
flash may stop firing for a while to protect the light-emitting unit.
The external flash does not fire.
 If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z6:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.272).
The external flash always fires at full output.
 If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will
always be fired at full output (p.234).
 When the external Speedlite’s [Flash metering mode] Custom
Function is set to [TTL] (autoflash), the flash will always be fired at full
output (p.243).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set
for the external Speedlite.
 If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite, flash
exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the
external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to
0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
 Under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to
[Auto] (p.236).
487
Troubleshooting Guide
The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.
 The built-in flash’s pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal
and not a malfunction.
The shutter makes two shutter release
sounds during Live View shooting.
 If you use flash, the shutter will make two shutter release sounds each
time you shoot (p.257).
During Live View shooting, a white <s> or
red <E> icon is displayed.
 It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
<s> icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.
If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View
shooting will soon stop automatically (p.290).
During movie shooting, a red E icon is displayed.
 It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the red
<E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie shooting will soon
stop automatically (p.343).
Movie shooting stops by itself.
 If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 5. To find
out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s Web site.
 If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically.
488
Troubleshooting Guide
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
 In shooting modes other than <a>, the ISO speed is set
automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set the ISO speed
(p.299).
The manually set ISO speed changes when
switching to movie shooting.
 ISO speed will be set according to the setting for [Range for stills]
during viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting, or that for [Range
for movies] during movie shooting with manual exposure.
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
 If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
 Zooming the lens during movie shooting may cause changes in the
exposure regardless of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes
or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
 If you move the camera to the left or right quickly or shoot a moving
subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear
during movie shooting.
 Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources
during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or
color tone may be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow shutter speed
may reduce the problem. The problem may be more noticeable in
time-lapse movie shooting.
489
Troubleshooting Guide
Wireless Functions
Wireless functions cannot be set.
 If the camera is connected to a computer, GPS receiver, or other
device with an interface cable, wireless functions cannot be set ([51:
Wireless communication settings] will be grayed out). Disconnect
the interface cable before changing any settings.
 Refer to the Wireless Function Instruction Manual.
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with the <6>, <5>, <9>,
or touch screen.
 Set the <R> switch downward (lock release, p.54).
 Check the [54: Multi function lock] setting (p.54).
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
 Check the [8C.Fn III -4: Custom Controls] setting (p.433).
During touch screen operations, the beeper suddenly
sounds softer.
 Check if your finger is blocking the speaker (p.26).
Touch screen operation is not possible.
 Check if [53: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive]
(p.63).
490
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and options.
 In Basic Zone modes, certain tabs and menu options are not
displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative Zone mode (p.58).
 Under the [9] tab, [Menu display] is set to [Display only My Menu
tab] (p.444).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
 Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
will be an underscore (p.181).
The file name starts with “MVI_”.
 It is a movie file (p.185).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may
not start from 0001 (p.184).
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
 Make sure the correct date and time are set (p.43).
 Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.43).
The date and time are not in the image.
 The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and
time are instead recorded in the image data as shooting information.
When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using
the date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.380).
491
Troubleshooting Guide
[###] is displayed.
 If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed (p.360).
In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow.
 In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become
slower due to the AF point display device’s characteristics. The display
speed will return to normal at room temperature.
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
 If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
 In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow
or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.
[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
 [Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the
<LOCK> position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection
status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.457).
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
 [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.351).
A red box is displayed on the image.
 [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.352).
492
Troubleshooting Guide
The image cannot be erased.
 If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.376).
The movie cannot be played back.
 Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.
Operation sound and mechanical sound
can be heard during movie playback.
 If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation sound will also be recorded. Using the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended (p.313).
The movie appears to freeze momentarily.
 If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure
movie shooting, the recording will stop momentarily until the
brightness stabilizes. In such a case, shoot in <a> mode (p.298).
No picture on the TV set.
 Make sure the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or
[For PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).
 Make sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.373).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
 If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (p.309).
My card reader does not recognize the card.
 Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, SDXC cards
may not be correctly recognized. In such a case, connect your camera
to the computer with the interface cable, then transfer the images to
the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software, p.512).
493
Troubleshooting Guide
I cannot process the RAW image.
 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera. Use
Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process the image
(p.512).
I cannot resize or crop the image.
 JPEG c, 1, 41, and 61 images cannot be resized or
cropped with the camera (p.395).
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.
 If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no
picture is taken (p.404).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.41).
494
Troubleshooting Guide
Computer Connection Problems
Communication between the connected camera and
computer does not work.
 When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5: Time-lapse movie]
to [Disable] (p.319).
I cannot download images to a computer.
 Install the EOS software on the computer (p.513).
 During a wireless connection, the camera cannot be connected to a
computer via an interface cable.
495
Error Codes
Error number
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Cause and countermeasures
Number
01
02
Error Message and Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
 Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon
lens, or remove and install the battery again (p.25, 26, 36).
Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card
with camera.
 Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.37, 64).
Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.
04
05
 Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.37, 64, 378).
The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on
again.
 Operate the power switch (p.41).
06
Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and
on again.
 Operate the power switch (p.41).
10, 20
30, 40
50, 60
70, 80
99
An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or
re-install the battery.
 Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery again, or
use a Canon lens (p.36, 41).
* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your nearest
Canon Service Center.
496
Specifications
• Type
Type:
Recording media:
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:
Lens mount:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in
flash
SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards supported
Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm
Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)
* Excluding EF-M lenses
(35mm-equivalent angle of view is that of a lens with
approx. 1.6x the focal length indicated.)
Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type:
Effective pixels:
Aspect ratio:
Dust delete feature:
CMOS sensor
Approx. 24.2 megapixels
* Rounded off to the nearest 10,000th.
3:2
Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending
• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Pixels recorded:
Aspect ratio:
Create/select a folder:
File numbering:
Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original),
RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible
L (Large)
: 24.0 megapixels (6000 x 4000)
M (Medium) : Approx. 10.6 megapixels (3984 x 2656)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 5.9 megapixels (2976 x 1984)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.5 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)
RAW
: 24.0 megapixels (6000 x 4000)
M-RAW
: 13.5 megapixels (4500 x 3000)
S-RAW
: 6.0 megapixels (3000 x 2000)
3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1
Possible
Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral,
Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1 - 3
497
Specifications
White balance:
Noise reduction:
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Highlight tone priority:
Lens aberration
correction:
Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset
(Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White
fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature
setting (approx. 2500-10000 K), White balance
correction, and White balance bracketing provided
* Flash color temperature information transmission
enabled
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
Auto Lighting Optimizer provided
Provided
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration
correction, Distortion correction
• Viewfinder
Type:
Coverage
(by aspect ratio):
Magnification:
Eye point:
Dioptric adjustment
range:
Focusing screen:
Grid display:
Electronic level:
Mirror:
Depth-of-field preview:
Eye-level pentaprism
3:2 (vertical: approx. 100%, horizontal: approx. 100%),
4:3 (vertical: approx. 100%, horizontal: approx. 97%),
16:9 (vertical: approx. 97%, horizontal: approx. 100%),
1:1 (vertical: approx. 100%, horizontal: approx. 96%)
* With eyepoint at approx. 22mm.
Approx. 0.95x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Approx. 22mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Fixed
Provided
Provided
Quick-return type
Provided
• Autofocus (for viewfinder shooting)
Type:
AF points:
Focusing brightness
range:
498
TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference
detection with the dedicated AF sensor
45 (Cross-type AF point: Max. 45 points)
* Number of available AF points, Dual cross-type AF
points, and cross-type AF points vary depending on the
lens used and aspect ratio settings.
* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with center AF point.
(AF group: When Group A lenses are used)
EV -3 - 18 (with the center AF point supporting f/2.8,
One-Shot AF, at room temperature, ISO 100)
Specifications
Focus operation:
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing
(MF)
AF area selection mode: Single-point AF (Manual selection), Zone AF (Manual
selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of
zone), 45-point automatic selection AF
AF point automatic
AF points can be selected automatically using
selection conditions:
information on colors equivalent to skin tones.
AI Servo AF
Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking,
characteristics:
AF point auto switching
AF fine adjustment:
AF Microadjustment (All lenses by same amount or
Adjust by lens)
AF-assist beam:
Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash
• Exposure Control
Metering mode:
Metering brightness
range:
Shooting mode:
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):
63-zone TTL open-aperture metering using 7560-pixel
RGB plus IR metering sensor
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 6.0% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 3.8% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Basic Zone modes:
Scene Intelligent Auto, Flash Off, Creative Auto, Special
scene modes (Food, Kids, Candlelight, Night Portrait,
Handheld Night Scene, HDR Backlight Control, Portrait,
Landscape, Close-up, Sports), Creative filters (Grainy
B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Toy camera effect,
Miniature effect, Water painting effect, HDR art standard,
HDR art vivid, HDR art bold, HDR art embossed)
Creative Zone modes:
Program AE, Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE,
Manual exposure, Bulb exposure, Custom shooting
mode
Basic Zone modes*: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set
automatically
* Handheld Night Scene: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set
automatically, Landscape: ISO 100 - ISO 1600 set
automatically
P, Tv, Av, M, B: ISO Auto, ISO 100 - ISO 16000 set
manually (1/3- and whole-stop increments), and ISO
expansion to H (equivalent to ISO 25600)
499
Specifications
ISO speed settings:
Exposure
compensation:
AE lock:
Anti-flicker:
Interval timer:
Bulb timer:
Range for stills, Auto range, and Minimum shutter speed
for auto settable
Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
AEB:
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
Auto:
Applied in One-Shot AF with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: With AE lock button
Possible
Shooting interval and shot count settable
Bulb exposure time settable
• HDR Shooting
Dynamic range
Auto, ±1, ±2, ±3
adjustment:
Effects:
Natural, Art standard, Art vivid, Art bold, Art embossed
Auto image alignment: Provided
• Multiple Exposures
Number of multiple
exposures:
Multiple-exposure
control:
2 to 9 exposures
Additive, Average
• Shutter
Type:
Shutter speed:
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
1/8000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range;
available range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync
at 1/250 sec.
• Drive System
Drive mode:
Continuous shooting
speed:
500
Single shooting, High-speed continuous shooting,
Low-speed continuous shooting, Silent single shooting,
Silent continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/remote
control, 2-sec. self-timer/remote control
High-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 7.0 shots/
sec.*
* Max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec. during Live View shooting
or when [Servo AF] is set.
Low-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/
sec.
Silent continuous shooting: Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
Specifications
Max. burst:
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 77 shots (approx. 110 shots)
RAW: Approx. 20 shots (approx. 25 shots)
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 20 shots (approx. 22
shots)
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2
aspect ratio, ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style) using
an 8 GB card.
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UHS-I compatible
16 GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.
• Flash
Built-in flash:
External Speedlite:
Flash metering:
Flash exposure
compensation:
FE lock:
PC terminal:
Flash control:
Retractable, auto pop-up flash
Guide No.: Approx. 12/39.4 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)
Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view
Recharge time: Approx. 3 sec.
Compatible with EX-series Speedlites
E-TTL II autoflash
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
None
Built-in flash function settings, external Speedlite function
settings, external Speedlite Custom Function settings
Wireless flash control via optical transmission possible
• Live View Shooting
Focus method:
AF method:
AF operation:
Focusing brightness
range:
Metering mode:
Metering brightness
range:
Exposure
compensation:
Dual Pixel CMOS AF system
Face+Tracking, FlexiZone-Multi, FlexiZone-Single
Manual focus (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)
One-Shot AF, Servo AF
EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering
(approx. 6.1% of Live View screen), Spot metering
(approx. 2.6% of Live View screen), Center-weighted
average metering
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
±3 stops in 1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments
501
Specifications
Creative filters:
Silent LV shooting:
Touch shutter:
Grid display:
Provided
Provided (Mode 1 and 2)
Provided
Three types
• Movie Shooting
Recording format:
Movie:
Audio:
Recording size and
frame rate:
Compression method:
Bit rate:
Focus method:
AF method:
Movie Servo AF:
Digital zoom:
Focusing brightness
range:
Metering mode:
502
MOV/MP4
MPEG-4 AVC / H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
MOV: Linear PCM, MP4: AAC
[MOV]
Full HD (1920x1080): 29.97p/25.00p/23.98p
[MP4]
Full HD (1920x1080): 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/
23.98p
HD (1280x720)
: 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p
[MOV] : ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
[MP4] : IPB (Standard), IPB (Light)
[MOV]
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 90 Mbps
[MP4]
Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 60 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 30 Mbps
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light) : Approx. 12 Mbps
HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard) : Approx. 26 Mbps
HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light)
: Approx. 4 Mbps
HDR Movie Shooting
: Approx. 30 Mbps
Dual Pixel CMOS AF system
Face+Tracking, FlexiZone-Multi, FlexiZone-Single
Manual focus (approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible)
Provided
* Movie Servo AF customizable
Approx. 3x - 10x
EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Center-weighted average or Evaluative metering
Specifications
Metering brightness
range:
Exposure control:
Exposure
compensation:
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):
ISO speed settings:
HDR Movie Shooting:
Creative filters for
movies:
Video snapshots:
Sound recording:
Headphones:
Grid display:
Time-lapse movie:
Still photo shooting:
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Autoexposure shooting (Program AE for movie shooting)
and manual exposure
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
For autoexposure shooting: ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set
automatically. In Creative Zone modes, the upper limit is
expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 25600).
For manual exposure shooting: ISO Auto (ISO 100 - ISO
12800 set automatically), ISO 100 - ISO 12800 set
manually (1/3- and whole-stop increments), expandable
to H (equivalent to ISO 25600)
Range for movie shooting settable
Possible
Memory, Dream, Old Movies, Dramatic B&W, Miniature
effect movie
Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Built-in stereo microphones, external stereo microphone
terminal provided
Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
Headphone terminal provided, sound volume adjustable
Three types
Shooting interval and number of shots settable
Required shooting time period, playback length, and
remaining card capacity viewable
Not possible during movie shooting
• LCD Monitor
Type:
Monitor size and dots:
Brightness adjustment:
Electronic level:
Interface languages:
Touch screen
technology:
Feature guide / Help:
TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Wide 7.7 cm (3.0 in) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Manual (7 levels)
Provided
25
Capacitive sensing
Displayable
503
Specifications
• Playback
Image display format:
Highlight alert:
AF point display:
Grid display:
Zoom magnification:
Image browsing
methods:
Image rotation:
Image protection:
Rating:
Movie playback:
Slide show:
Background music:
Single-image display (without shooting information),
Single-image display (with basic information), Singleimage display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed
information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture
Style 1, Picture Style 2, Color space/noise reduction,
Lens aberration correction), Index display (4/9/36/100
images)
Overexposed highlights blink
Provided (may not be displayed depending on shooting
conditions)
Three types
Approx. 1.5x - 10x
Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting
date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by rating
Possible
Possible
Provided
Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI), built-in speaker
All images, by date, by folder, by movies, by stills, by
rating
Selectable for slide shows and movie playback
• Post-Processing of Images
In-camera RAW image Brightness adjustment, White balance, Picture Style,
processing:
Auto Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,
JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Peripheral
illumination correction, Distortion correction, Chromatic
aberration correction
Resize:
Provided
Creative filters:
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold effect,
Water painting effect, Toy camera effect, Miniature effect
• Print Ordering
DPOF:
Version 1.1 compliant
• Customization Features
Custom Functions:
My Menu:
Custom shooting mode:
Copyright information:
504
26
Up to 5 screens can be registered
Register under Mode Dial’s C1 or C2
Entry and appending possible
Specifications
• Interface
DIGITAL terminal:
Computer communication (Hi-Speed USB equivalent),
GPS Receiver GP-E2, Connect Station CS100
connection
Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
HDMI mini OUT
terminal:
External microphone IN 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
terminal:
Remote control terminal:For Remote Switch RS-60E3
Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Compatible
• Power
Battery:
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6, quantity 1
* AC power usable with household power outlet
accessories.
* With Battery Grip BG-E14 attached, AA/R6 batteries
can be used.
Battery information:
Remaining capacity, Shutter count, Recharge
performance, and Battery registration possible
With viewfinder shooting:
Number of possible
Approx. 960 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
shots:
(Based on CIPA testing approx. 860 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
With Live View shooting:
standards, with 50%
Approx. 300 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
flash use)
approx. 270 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
Movie shooting time:
Total approx. 1 hr. 50 min. at room temperature (23°C/
73°F)
Total approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at low temperatures (0°C/
32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D):Approx. 139.0 x 105.2 x 78.5 mm / 5.47 x 4.14 x 3.09 in.
Weight:
Approx. 730 g / 25.75 oz. (Based on CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 650 g / 22.93 oz. (Body only)
505
Specifications
• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
85% or less
 All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
 Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except
weight for camera body only).
 Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
 If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens manufacturer.
506
Trademarks
 Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
 Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
 Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
 SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
 HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
 All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a
personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
507
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g.,
a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty
does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it
with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
508
Digital Camera Model DS126591 Systems
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used
with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A. Inc.
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.
Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)
CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
509
USA and Canada only:
The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is
recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on
how to recycle this battery.
For CA, USA only
Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
510
14
Software Start Guide /
Downloading Images to a Computer
This chapter explains the following:
 Overview of the software for EOS DIGITAL cameras
 How to download and install the software on a computer
 How to download and view the Software Instruction
Manuals (PDF files)
 How to download images from the camera to a computer
511
Software Start Guide
Software Overview
This section explains an overview of various software applications for
EOS DIGITAL cameras. Internet connection is required to download
and install the software. Download and installation are not possible in
environments with no Internet connection.
EOS Utility
With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to
transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.
You can also use this software to set various camera settings and shoot
remotely from the computer connected to the camera. Also, you can
copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample Music*, to the
card.
* You can use the background music as the soundtrack for a video snapshot
album, movie, or slide show played back with your camera.
Digital Photo Professional
This software is recommended for users who shoot RAW images. You
can view, edit, and print RAW and JPEG images.
* Some functions differ between the version to be installed on a 64-bit computer
and that to be installed on a 32-bit computer.
Picture Style Editor
You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture Style
files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in
processing images.
512
Software Start Guide
Downloading and Installing the Software
 Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the
software. Otherwise, the software will not be installed properly.
 Even if a previous version of the software is installed on your computer,
follow the procedure below to install the latest version. (The previous
version will be overwritten.)
1
Download the software.
 Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the following
Canon Web site.
www.canon.com/icpd
 Select your country or region of residence and download the
software.
 Decompress it on the computer.
For Windows: Click the displayed installer file to start the
installer.
For Macintosh: A dmg file will be created and displayed. Follow
the steps below to start the installer.
(1) Double-click the dmg file.
 A drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop.
If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive
icon to display it.
(2) Double-click the installer file.
 The installer starts.
2 Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen
instructions to install.
 For Macintosh, click [Install].
513
Downloading and Viewing the Software
Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)
Internet connection is required to download the Software Instruction
Manuals (PDF files). Download is not possible in environments with no
Internet connection.
1
Download the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Connect to the Internet and access the following Canon Web site.
www.canon.com/icpd
 Select your country or region of residence and download the
Instruction Manuals.
2 View the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Double-click a downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open
it.
 To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat
Reader DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version
recommended) is required.
 Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded free from the
Internet.
 To learn how to use a PDF viewer, refer to its Help section.
514
Downloading Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to download the images in the camera to a
computer. There are two ways to do this.
Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1 Install the software (p.513).
an interface cable to connect
2 Use
the camera to the computer.
 Connect the cable to the camera’s
digital terminal with the cable plug’s
<D> icon facing the front of the
camera.
 Connect the plug to the computer’s
USB terminal.
EOS Utility to download the
3 Use
images.
 Refer to the EOS Utility Instruction
Manual.
During a wireless connection, the camera cannot be connected to a
computer via an interface cable.
515
Downloading Images to a Computer
Downloading Images with a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to download images to a computer.
Install the software (p.513).
1
the card into the card
2 Insert
reader.
Digital Photo Professional to
3 Use
download the images.
 Refer to the Digital Photo
Professional Instruction Manual.
When downloading images from the camera to a computer with a card
reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the
computer.
516
Index
Numerics
10- or 2-sec. self-timer ..................140
1280x720 (movie) .........................307
1920x1080 (movie) .......................307
45-point AF auto selection ............120
A
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ............78
Access lamp....................................38
Accessories.......................................3
Adobe RGB...................................181
AE lock..........................................203
AEB
(Auto Exposure Bracketing) ...201, 413
AF
AF area selection
mode.........................120, 121, 124
AF-assist beam.................119, 419
AF groups .................................128
AF method ........................276, 327
AF Microadjustment..................427
AF-ON (AF start) button .............50
AF operation .....................116, 274
AF point ....................................120
AF point selection .............122, 436
AF points light up in red............119
AF sensor .................................127
Area AF frame ..................120, 125
Beep (Beeper) ............................66
Color tracking ...................126, 422
Cross-type focusing..................127
Difficult subjects for AF .....136, 284
Dual cross-type focusing ..........127
Manual focusing (MF).......137, 288
Out of focus ........................49, 284
Recomposing..............................81
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)..............118
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ........81, 118
Tracking sensitivity ...........416, 418
ALL-I (For editing/I-only) ...............308
Ambience-based shots .................108
Angle of view .................................. 48
Anti-flicker shooting ...................... 179
Aperture-priority AE...................... 194
Area AF frame ...................... 120, 125
Art bold effect ....................... 268, 401
Aspect ratio .................................. 146
Attenuator..................................... 312
Auto Lighting Optimizer ................ 169
Auto playback............................... 369
Auto power off .......................... 41, 66
Auto reset ..................................... 185
Auto rotate vertical images........... 387
Autofocus 9 AF
Automatic selection
(AF point).............................. 120, 125
Av (Aperture-priority AE) .............. 194
B
B (Bulb) ........................................ 204
Background blur ............................. 86
Background music........................ 372
Basic Zone modes.......................... 30
Battery ................................ 34, 36, 42
Battery Grip ............................ 42, 468
Beep (Beeper) ................................ 66
Black-and-white
images.......................... 108, 155, 159
Bracketing ............................ 168, 201
Built-in flash.................................. 228
Bulb exposures............................. 204
C
w (Custom shooting modes) ...... 445
C (Creative Auto) ......................... 84
Cable .................................... 373, 468
Camera
Camera shake............................ 49
Camera vibration blur............... 219
Clearing the camera settings ..... 68
517
Index
Holding the camera ....................49
Settings display ........................450
Candlelight......................................91
Cards ..............................5, 25, 37, 64
Card reminder ............................38
Formatting ..................................64
Low-level formatting ...................65
Troubleshooting....................39, 65
Write protection ..........................37
Center-weighted average
metering........................................199
Charger.....................................32, 34
Chromatic aberration correction ...176
Cleaning (image sensor)...............403
Clearing the camera settings ..........68
Clipped highlights .........................351
Close-ups........................................97
Color saturation ............................158
Color space...................................181
Color temperature.................162, 166
Color tone .........................89, 91, 158
Continuous file numbering ............184
Continuous shooting .....................138
Contrast ........................................158
Copyright information....................186
Creative Auto ..................................84
Creative filters.......101, 266, 316, 399
Creative filters for movies .............316
Dramatic B&W..........................318
Dream.......................................317
Memory ....................................317
Miniature effect movie ..............318
Old Movies ...............................317
O (Creative Zone) icon....................8
Creative Zone modes .....................31
Cropping (images) ........................397
Cross-type focusing ......................127
Custom Controls .....................57, 433
Custom Functions.........................410
518
Custom shooting mode ................ 445
Custom white balance (WB)......... 166
D
Date/time........................................ 43
Daylight saving time ....................... 44
DC Coupler .................................. 456
Default settings .............................. 68
Depth-of-field preview ... 195, 256, 261
Dials
Main Dial.................................... 51
Mode Dial................................... 51
Quick Control Dial...................... 52
Digital terminal ....................... 26, 515
Dioptric adjustment ........................ 49
Direct selection of AF point .......... 436
DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format).......... 380
Dragging......................................... 62
Drive mode................................... 138
Dual cross-type focusing.............. 127
Dust Delete Data.......................... 405
E
Electronic level ............................... 72
Erasing images ............................ 378
Error codes................................... 496
Evaluative metering...................... 198
exFAT ............................................. 65
Exposure compensation............... 200
Exposure level increments ........... 413
Exposure level indicator ......... 29, 451
Exposure simulation..................... 271
External Speedlite 9 Flash
Eyecup ......................................... 220
Eye-Fi cards ................................. 457
Eyepiece cover............................... 33
Index
F
FE lock ..................................232, 233
Feature guide..................................75
FEB ...............................................242
File extension................................185
File name ......................................184
File size.........................143, 309, 349
Filter effects ..................................156
Final image simulation ..........261, 301
Fine (image-recording
quality) ..................................143, 144
Firmware .......................................476
First-curtain synchronization .........241
Fish-eye effect ..............104, 268, 401
Flash (Speedlite)
Built-in flash ..............................228
Custom Functions.....................243
Effective range..........................229
External flash............................233
FE lock..............................232, 233
Flash control .............................235
Flash exposure
compensation ...........230, 233, 242
Flash mode...............................240
Flash off..............................83, 107
Flash sync contacts ....................26
Flash sync speed......................234
Manual flash .....................240, 254
Red-eye reduction ....................230
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain)........................241
Wireless....................................241
Focus indicator................................78
Focus lock.......................................81
Focus mode switch .........47, 137, 288
Focusing 9 AF
Focusing point (AF point)..............120
Folder creation/selection...............182
Food................................................89
Formatting ...................................... 64
Frame rate.................................... 307
Full High-Definition
(Full HD) ............................... 293, 307
Functions settable by
shooting mode.............................. 460
G
GPS.............................................. 474
Grainy B/W ................... 103, 268, 400
Grid display ............ 71, 270, 331, 347
H
Handheld Night Scene ................... 93
HD (movie) ................................... 307
HDMI ............................................ 363
HDMI CEC.................................... 374
HDR.............................................. 207
HDR art bold................................. 105
HDR art embossed....................... 105
HDR art standard ......................... 104
HDR art vivid ................................ 105
HDR Backlight Control ................... 94
Help ................................................ 76
High-Definition (HD) movies......... 307
High ISO speed noise reduction ... 170
Highlight alert ............................... 351
Highlight tone priority.................... 174
High-speed continuous shooting ... 138
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)........ 352
Hot shoe ................................. 26, 233
Household power ......................... 456
I
ICC profile .................................... 181
Illumination (LCD panel)................. 55
Image dust prevention.................. 403
Image review time .......................... 67
Image-recording quality........ 142, 306
519
Index
Images
AF point display........................352
Auto playback...........................369
Auto rotation .............................387
Erasing .....................................378
File numbering..........................184
Highlight alert ...........................351
Histogram .................................352
Index display ............................353
Jump display (image browsing)...354
Magnification ............................355
Manual rotation.........................358
Playback...................................345
Protecting .................................376
Rating .......................................359
Review time................................67
Shooting information ................348
Slide show ................................369
Viewing on a TV set .........363, 373
Index display.................................353
INFO. button... 258, 262, 300, 346, 450
Initializing the card (formatting).......64
Interval timer .................................223
IPB (Light).....................................308
IPB (Standard) ..............................308
ISO speed.....................148, 296, 299
Automatic setting (Auto) ...........150
Automatic setting range............152
ISO expansion..........................151
Manual setting range................151
Minimum shutter speed ............153
Setting increments....................413
J
JPEG ............................................142
Jump display.................................354
K
Kids.................................................90
520
L
Landscape...................................... 96
Language ....................................... 46
Large
(image-recording quality) ..... 143, 395
Large Zone AF ............................. 120
LCD monitor ............................. 24, 40
Brightness adjustment ............. 386
Electronic level........................... 72
Image playback........................ 345
Menu display...................... 58, 470
Shooting function settings... 55, 451
Vari-Angle ............................ 40, 82
LCD panel ...................................... 28
Lens ......................................... 25, 47
Chromatic aberration
correction ................................. 176
Distortion correction................. 176
Lock release .............................. 48
Peripheral illumination
correction ................................. 175
Lighting/scene-based shots ......... 112
Live View shooting ................. 82, 255
AF operation .................... 116, 274
Aspect ratio.............................. 146
Creative filters.......................... 266
Exposure simulation ................ 271
Face+Tracking ......................... 277
FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 279
FlexiZone - Single.................... 281
Grid display.............................. 270
Information display................... 258
Manual focusing (MF) .............. 288
Metering timer.......................... 273
Possible shots.......................... 257
Quick Control ........................... 265
Silent shooting ......................... 272
LOCK ............................................. 54
Long exposure noise reduction .... 172
Long exposures............................ 204
Low-speed continuous shooting... 138
Index
M
M (Manual exposure) ............196, 298
Macro photography .........................97
Magnified view ......................288, 355
Main Dial .........................................51
Manual exposure ..................196, 298
Manual focusing (MF) ...........137, 288
Manual reset .................................185
Manual selection (AF point) ..........122
Maximum burst .....................143, 145
Medium
(image-recording quality) ......143, 395
Memory cards 9 Cards
Menu ...............................................58
My Menu...................................440
Setting procedure .......................59
Settings.....................................470
3 icon .........................................8
Metering mode ..............................198
Metering timer ...............................273
MF (manual focusing) ...........137, 288
Microadjustment............................427
Microphone ...........................294, 313
Miniature effect .............104, 269, 401
Miniature effect movies .................318
Mirror lockup .................................219
Mode Dial..................................30, 51
Monochrome images ....108, 155, 159
MOV..............................................306
Movies...........................................293
AE lock .....................................295
AF method ........................304, 327
Attenuator .................................312
Autoexposure Shooting ............294
Compression method ...............308
Creative filters...........................316
Editing out first and last scenes ...367
Enjoying movies .......................363
External microphone.................313
File size.................................... 309
Frame rate ............................... 307
Grid display .............................. 331
HDR Movie Shooting ............... 314
Information display................... 300
Manual exposure shooting....... 298
Metering timer .......................... 331
Microphone ...................... 294, 313
Movie digital zoom ................... 311
Movie recording size ................ 306
Movie Servo AF ....................... 326
Playback .......................... 363, 365
Quick Control ........................... 305
Recording time......................... 309
Sound recording....................... 312
Time-lapse ............................... 319
Video snapshot album ............. 333
Video snapshots....................... 333
Viewing on a TV set ......... 363, 373
Wind filter ................................. 312
MP4 .............................................. 306
M-RAW (Medium RAW) ....... 143, 144
Multi function lock........................... 54
Multi Shot Noise Reduction .......... 170
Multi-controller................................ 53
Multiple exposures ....................... 212
My Menu....................................... 440
N
Night Portrait .................................. 92
Night scenes............................. 92, 93
Noise reduction
High ISO speed........................ 170
Long exposures ....................... 172
Nomenclature ................................. 26
Non-Canon flash units.................. 234
Normal
(image-recording quality)...... 143, 144
NTSC.................................... 307, 475
521
Index
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF)...117, 274
Orientation linked AF point ...........421
P
P (Program AE) ............................190
PAL .......................................307, 475
Partial metering.............................198
Peripheral illumination correction...175
Personal white balance.................165
Photobook set-up..........................384
Picture Style..................154, 157, 160
Pixel count ....................................142
Playback .......................................345
Portrait ............................................95
Possible shots.................42, 143, 257
Power
Auto power off ............................66
Battery information ...................452
Battery level........................42, 452
Household power .....................456
Possible shots ....................42, 257
Recharge....................................34
Recharge performance.............452
Pressing completely........................50
Pressing halfway.............................50
Print order (DPOF)........................380
Program AE ..................................190
Program shift ................................191
Protecting images .........................376
Q
Q
(Quick Control)...56, 106, 265, 305, 361
Quick Control Dial...........................52
522
R
Rating........................................... 359
Rating mark.................................. 359
RAW ............................. 142, 143, 144
RAW image processing................ 390
RAW+JPEG ................................. 142
Recharging..................................... 34
Red-eye reduction........................ 230
Reduced display........................... 353
Release shutter without card.......... 38
Remote control shooting .............. 221
Remote switch.............................. 221
Resizing ....................................... 395
Rotation (image)................... 358, 387
S
Safety precautions ......................... 20
Safety shift ................................... 415
Scene icons.......................... 260, 297
Scene Intelligent Auto .................... 78
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Second-curtain synchronization ... 241
Self-timer.............................. 140, 222
Sensitivity 9 ISO speed
Sensor cleaning ........................... 403
Sepia (Monochrome)............ 108, 159
Servo AF ...................................... 275
Sharpness .................................... 158
Shooting function settings ...... 55, 451
Shooting information display ........ 348
Shooting modes ............................. 30
Av (Aperture-priority AE).......... 194
B (Bulb).................................... 204
w (Custom shooting).............. 445
M (Manual exposure)............... 196
P (Program AE) ....................... 190
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ............ 192
Index
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) .......78
C (Creative Auto) .....................84
7 (Flash Off).............................83
8 (Special scene)
P (Food)..................................89
C (Kids) ..................................90
x (Candlelight) .......................91
6 (Night Portrait) ....................92
F (Handheld Night Scene) .....93
G (HDR Backlight Control).....94
2 (Portrait)..............................95
3 (Landscape) ......................96
4 (Close-up)...........................97
5 (Sports)..............................98
v (Creative filters) ..................101
G (Grainy B/W).....................103
W (Soft focus) .......................103
X (Fish-eye effect)................104
H (Toy camera effect) ..........104
c (Miniature effect)...............104
Z (Water painting effect) ......104
A (HDR art standard) .........104
B (HDR art vivid) ................105
C (HDR art bold) ................105
D (HDR art embossed).......105
Shutter button .................................50
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) ............................241
Shutter-priority AE.........................192
Silent shooting
Silent continuous shooting........138
Silent LV shooting.....................272
Silent single shooting................138
Single-image display.....................346
Single-point AF .............................120
Slide show.....................................369
Small
(image-recording quality) ......143, 395
Soft focus ......................103, 268, 400
Software........................................512
Sound-recording level ...................312
Speaker ........................................ 365
Special scene mode (SCN) ............ 88
Speedlite 9 Flash
Sports ............................................. 98
Spot metering ............................... 198
S-RAW (Small RAW)............ 143, 144
sRGB............................................ 181
Stop down aperture ...... 195, 256, 261
Strap ............................................... 33
System map ................................. 468
T
Tapping........................................... 61
Temperature warning............ 290, 343
Time zone....................................... 43
Time-lapse movie ......................... 319
Tone priority.................................. 174
Toning effect (monochrome)......... 159
Touch beeping ................................ 62
Touch screen .......................... 61, 356
Touch shutter................................ 286
Toy camera effect ......... 104, 269, 401
Tripod socket .................................. 27
Troubleshooting............................ 481
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................. 192
U
USB (digital) terminal ................... 515
V
Vari-Angle LCD monitor............ 40, 82
Video snapshot album .................. 333
Video snapshots ........................... 333
Video system................ 307, 373, 475
Viewfinder....................................... 29
Dioptric adjustment .................... 49
Electronic level........................... 72
Flicker detection......................... 74
Grid display ................................ 71
523
Index
Viewing on a TV set..............363, 373
Volume (movie playback)..............366
W
Warning icon .................................425
Water painting effect .....104, 268, 401
White balance (WB)......................162
Ambience priority (Q) ............163
Bracketing ................................168
Color temperature setting.........166
Correction.................................167
Custom .....................................164
Personal ...................................165
White priority (Qw) ................163
Wi-Fi/NFC .....................................474
Wind filter......................................312
Wireless communication
settings .........................................474
Wireless flash shooting.................244
Z
Zone AF ........................................120
524
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of February 2017.
For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon Web site.
CPX-E328-000
© CANON INC. 2017
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement